{"id":241,"date":"2016-01-18T16:00:13","date_gmt":"2016-01-18T16:00:13","guid":{"rendered":"http:\/\/christianapeterson.keithmtaylor.com\/?page_id=241"},"modified":"2024-01-26T20:23:17","modified_gmt":"2024-01-26T20:23:17","slug":"catalog-11","status":"publish","type":"page","link":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/catalog-11\/","title":{"rendered":"Catalog 11 \u2014 Foreign Photography"},"content":{"rendered":"
    \n
  1. AUSTRIA. KOPPITZ, Rudolf.<\/strong> Jo-Ann Conklin and Monika Faber, Rudolf Koppitz, 1884-1936<\/em>, Vienna: Verlag Christian Brandst\u00e4tter, 1995. Softcover,\u00a011 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 128 pages, halftone illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

    This handsome monograph was produced in conjunction with an exhibition seen at the University of Iowa Museum of Art and in Europe. Conklin, Faber, and Peter Weiermair provide essays that cover Koppitz\u2019s time as an apprentice, traveler, pilot, exhibitor, and teacher. Also addressed are his major bodies of work: outdoor male nudes, dance pictures, and ethnographic photographs. His signature piece, Bewegungsstudie<\/em> (\u201cMovement Study\u201d) features a nude female figure backed by a frieze-like group of black-robed women, reproduced on the cover. Rudolf Koppitz (1884-1936) was the most important photographer in Austria between the World Wars, producing work that was an amalgamation of modernism and pictorialism. This copy signed by Conklin, Faber, and Koppitz\u2019s daughter, Liselotte Tavs-Koppitz. Fine condition. $100<\/p>\n

     <\/p>\n

      \n
    1. AUSTRIA. KRUCKENHAUSER, Stefan. <\/strong>Snow Canvas: Ski, Men and Mountains with the Leica<\/em>, Berlin: Photokino-Verlag, 1937. Hardcover (blue-stamped gray cloth and paper over boards), 10 \u00bd x 8 \u00bc inches, 120 pages, 88 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

      Professor Kruckenhauser examines skiing in the Arlberg Pass of western Austria. Combining his interest in the sport and his aptitude with his Leica III, he shows the beauty of the mountain, patterns in the snow, and dramatic skiing moves by his fellow adventurers. Small edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

       <\/p>\n

        \n
      1. BELGIUM. MISONNE, L\u00e9onard.<\/strong> Marian Schwabik and Maurice Misonne, L\u00e9onard Misonne, Ein Fotograf aus Belgien, 1870-1943<\/em>, Seebruck am Chiemsee, Germany: Heering-Verlag, 1976. Hardcover (black and brown-stamped tan cloth), 10 \u00bc x 12 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 50 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

        A large-scale tribute to Misonne\u2019s soft-focus, accessible images of both urban and rural scenes bathed in glowing light. The collaborative text draws on a family member\u2019s insights into Misonne\u2019s life and work. The oversize plates are so romantic that they are paired with bits of verse from various writers, most of them contemporaries of the photographer. Text in German. Near fine condition, with fold to front free endpaper. $125<\/p>\n

         <\/p>\n

          \n
        1. BERMUDA. FRISSELL, Toni.<\/strong> The Happy Island<\/em>, New York: T. J. Maloney, 1946. Hardcover (paper over boards), 10 \u00be x 9 inches, 72 pages, 47 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

          Due to the success of another children\u2019s book, U.S. Camera publisher Maloney secured Frissell to illustrate this title. It is set on the island of Bermuda and is seen through the eyes of native children. Her young subjects picnic, swim, fish, boat, and ride both turtles and bikes. Includes a story by Sally Lee Woodall, but Frissell\u2019s images dominate the pages to a greater degree than her two other children\u2019s books. Light foxing, a few bumped corners, some separation at spine, in dustjacket that is missing a few small pieces. $75<\/p>\n

           <\/p>\n

            \n
          1. BOSNIA. PERESS, Gilles. <\/strong> Farewell to Bosnia<\/em>, New York: Scalo, 1994. Hardcover (paper over boards), 14 \u00bd x 11 inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

            This large-scale book, issued without a dustjacket, comprises Peress\u2019s insightful documentation of the impact of the 1993 Bosnian war on its civilian population. Traveling by car from the center of the country to Mostar and Sarajevo, he photographed refugees, the wounded, and the dead, both young and old. His graphically strong images are well-reproduced and printed large on the pages, for maximum visual impact. Mint condition, in shrink wrap. $125<\/p>\n

             <\/p>\n

              \n
            1. BRAZIL. FERREZ, Gilberto, and Weston J. Naef<\/strong>. Pioneer Photographers of Brazil, 1840-1920<\/em>, New York: Center for Inter-American Relations, 1976. Hardcover (gold-stamped black cloth), 8 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 144 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

              The co-authors give a brief history of photography\u2019s first eighty years in Brazil. Includes portraits of the Imperial Family and a map of the country keyed to a chronological grid with cities and photographers. The bulk of the book comprises biographies and pictures by fifteen Brazilian photographers, virtually all of them unknown to North Americans at the time. Among them: Milato Augusto de Azevedo, Victor Frond, and Marc Ferrez, the standout. This copy signed by author Naef. Fine condition. $75<\/p>\n

               <\/p>\n

                \n
              1. BRAZIL. FERREZ, Gilberto.<\/strong> Photography in Brazil, 1840-1900<\/em>, Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1984. Hardcover (gold-stamped black cloth),\u00a011 \u00be x 9 inches, 244 pages, 263 duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                This is a thorough study of the major photographers and studios in nineteenth-century Brazil, with special emphasis on landscapes and city scenes. Much of the work was commissioned by the state, resulting in the largest photographic production of any Latin American country, and the majority is retained today by government-supported institutions. The book is organized by city, with a special section on Marc Ferrez, Brazil\u2019s greatest photographer and the author\u2019s grandfather. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with indentations on back. $50<\/p>\n

                 <\/p>\n

                  \n
                1. BRAZIL. VITALI, Massimo. <\/strong>\u201cBrazil Through the Lens of Massimo Vitali,\u201d New York Times Magazine<\/em>, March 3, 2013.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                  Cover story, with four additional color halftone illustrations by Vitali, all presented as two-page spreads. The subjects are the Maranhenses National Park with swimmers and white sands, the favela Parais\u00f3polis in S\u00e3o Paulo, the Prainha beach in Niter\u00f3i, and the Ceagesp market in S\u00e3o Paulo. Light wrinkles to cover. $10<\/p>\n

                   <\/p>\n

                    \n
                  1. BRAZIL. WEBER, Bruce. <\/strong>O Rio de Janeiro<\/em>, New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1986. Softcover, 14 \u00bd x 11 inches, unpaginated, 130 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                    Weber\u2019s oversize ode to the great Brazilian city of Rio, issued only in soft. It pictures mostly attractive young men and women, on the beach and enjoying the city\u2019s energetic night life. Features some gatefolds and drawings by Richard Giglio. Minor edgewear and spotting to covers. $500<\/p>\n

                     <\/p>\n

                      \n
                    1. CANADA. Contemporary Canadian Photography from the Collection of the National Film Board<\/em><\/strong>, Edmonton, Alberta: Hurtig, 1984. Hardcover (stamped cloth), 11 \u00be x 10 \u00bc inches, 176 pages, 127 halftones (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                      A strong survey of Canadian photography beginning around 1950 and emphasizing work from 1970 to the mid-eighties. Includes Karsh, Evergon, Robert Frank, and many others. Texts, in French and English, by Hugh Maclennan and Martha Langford. The cover presents contact-print portraits of Yousuf Karsh by Arnaud Maggs. Mint condition, in shrink wrap. $75<\/p>\n

                       <\/p>\n

                        \n
                      1. CANADA. NOTMAN, William. <\/strong>The World of William Notman<\/em>, Boston: David R. Godine, 1993. Hardcover (gold-stamped black cloth), 12 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 232 pages, duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                        This book presents a selection of the extensive documentation that Notman (1826-1891), Canada\u2019s leading nineteenth-century photographer, produced in the country. He and his sons maintained studios in cities all across the nation, from the mid-1800s through the 1930s. They photographed politicians and authors, boats and bridges, sporting events and college campuses, churches and more. With text by Roger Hall, Gordon Dodds, and Stanley Triggs. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                         <\/p>\n

                          \n
                        1. CANADA. TORONTO. <\/strong>Maia-Mari Sutnik, Responding to Photography: Selected Work from Private Toronto Collections<\/em>, Toronto: Art Gallery of Ontario, 1984. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 \u00bc inches, 96 pages, halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                          Accompanied an exhibition of over 150 photographs at the museum, with the essay \u201cA Republic of Images\u201d by Geoffrey James. Along with international workers, includes pictures by Canadian photographers such as William Notman, Ralph Greenhill, Lynne Cohen, Michel Lambeth, and Michael Snow. Cover lightly rubbed. $25<\/p>\n

                           <\/p>\n

                            \n
                          1. CANADA. TORONTO CAMERA CLUB.<\/strong> Andrew Oliver, The First Hundred Years: An Historical Portrait of the Toronto Camera Club<\/em>, Toronto Camera Club, 1988. Hardcover (paper over boards), 11 \u00be x 9 \u00bd inches, 128 pages, 105 halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                            Despite the book\u2019s title, club historian Oliver concentrates on the group\u2019s early years, from 1888 to about World War II. He discusses its formation, locations, costs, and activities such as lantern-slide showings, annual salons, outings, and publication of its newsletter Focus<\/em>. Among the members also affiliated with the Royal Photographic Society who contribute black-and-white images are Ralph Brunner, Don Lizar, R. A. Panter, Ron Sorley, and Edith Verity. But the book\u2019s images are weighted towards more recent, color work. Fine condition. $35 \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                             <\/p>\n

                              \n
                            1. CANADA. VANDERPANT, John. <\/strong>Charles C. Hill, John Vanderpant: Photographs<\/em>, Ottawa: National Gallery of Canada, 1976. Softcover,\u00a09 \u00bd x 8 \u00bd inches, 96 pages, 56 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                              This is the first monograph on Vanderpant, one of the few Canadian pictorialists to achieve international fame. It includes a remembrance by the son of a painter friend of the photographer\u2019s and Hill\u2019s biographical essay. Vanderpant\u2019s pictures from the 1920s were largely soft-focus urban scenes, while in the thirties he added still lifes and took a more modernist approach. John Vanderpant (1884-1939) was born in the Netherlands, moved to Canada in 1911, and from the mid-1920s was prominent in the Vancouver art scene, operating a studio and making creative photographs until his death. Bilingual text in French and English. $25<\/p>\n

                               <\/p>\n

                                \n
                              1. CHINA. BEATON, Cecil. <\/strong>Chinese Album<\/em>, London: B.T. Batsford, 1945. Hardcover (blue-stamped yellow cloth), 9 x 7 inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                Comprises images of rural and small town China that Beaton made on assignment from the British Ministry of Information. Near fine condition, in dustjacket in protective sleeve, with previous owner\u2019s name and date. $50<\/p>\n

                                 <\/p>\n

                                  \n
                                1. CHINA. BEATON, Cecil. <\/strong>Harold B. Rattenbury, Face to Face with China<\/em>, London: George G. Harrap & Co., 1945. Hardcover (gold-stamped green cloth), 8 \u00bd x 5 \u00be inches, 144 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                  Rattenbury\u2019s text and Beaton\u2019s photographs cover all aspects of Chinese life, in twenty chapters on subjects like religion, revolution, education, womanhood, home, and government. This fairly uncommon Beaton item includes 15 pictorial charts in color, designed by the Isotype Institute. One corner bumped and mild wear to bottom of spine, in dustjacket that is edgeworn. $75<\/p>\n

                                   <\/p>\n

                                    \n
                                  1. CHINA. BUCK, Pearl S. <\/strong>China Past and Present<\/em>, New York: John Day Co., 1972. Hardcover (black-stamped white cloth), 10 \u00bc x 8 \u00bc inches, 180 pages, 40 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                    American writer and novelist Pearl Buck spent most of the first forty years of her life in China and even adopted a Chinese name. Here, she writes about the long history of the country, its religions, customs, and culture, and also lovingly portrays Chinese individuals who she knew and learned from. This book was published during Mao Tse-Tung\u2019s Cultural Revolution and when Buck applied for a return visa it was denied. It features pictures by regular visitors to China by the Magnum photographers Ren\u00e9 Burri, Henri Cartier-Bresson, and Marc Riboud. Dustjacket with a little rubbing and tiny wear to top of spine. $35<\/p>\n

                                     <\/p>\n

                                      \n
                                    1. CHINA. CAPA, Cornell. <\/strong>Behind the Great Wall of China: Photographs from 1870 to the Present<\/em>, New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art, 1972. Hardcover (red-stamped brown cloth), 8 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                      Edited by Capa, this book contains Chinese images by John Thomson, Robert Capa, Marc Riboud, Ren\u00e9 Burri, Henri Cartier-Bresson, and two others. Contains an historical essay by curator Weston J. Naef, and short essays by all seven photographers. This copy signed by Naef and Riboud. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with a few tears. $75<\/p>\n

                                       <\/p>\n

                                        \n
                                      1. CHINA. CARTIER-BRESSON, Henri. <\/strong>China, as Photographed by Henri Cartier-Bresson<\/em>, New York: Bantham, 1964. Softcover, 7 x 4 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 85 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                        Text by HCB and Barbara Brakeley Miller, and featuring quality gravure reproductions. Covers soiled and worn. $10<\/p>\n

                                         <\/p>\n

                                          \n
                                        1. CHINA. CARTIER-BRESSON, Henri. <\/strong>John F. Melby, The Mandate of Heaven: Record of a Civil War: China, 1945-49<\/em>, University of Toronto Press, 1968. Hardcover (black-stamped tan cloth), 9 \u00bd x 6 \u00bc inches, 312 pages, 18 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                          All these pictures originally appeared in Cartier-Bresson\u2019s 1956 book From One China to Another<\/em>. Dustjacket missing small pieces. $35<\/p>\n

                                          \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                            \n
                                          1. CHINA. RIBOUD, Marc. <\/strong>Capital of Heaven<\/em>, New York: Doubleday, 1990. Hardcover (blind and red-stamped black cloth), 13 \u00be x 10 inches, 144 pages, color halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                            This book represented Riboud\u2019s homage to Huang Shan, the revered range of granite peaks on the Yangtze River, 300 miles west of Shanghai. A place of pilgrimage for artists of all persuasions, the mountains are a \u201cpermanent embodiment of the Chinese soul.\u201d Riboud\u2019s images capture the peaks, often shrouded in fog, and its many types of visitors, trekking up and down the hundreds of carved stairs. With an introduction by Chinese poet Francois Cheng. Near fine condition, in lightly rubbed dustjacket. $35<\/p>\n

                                             <\/p>\n

                                              \n
                                            1. CRIMEA. FENTON, Roger.<\/strong> Helmut and Alison Gernsheim, Roger Fenton: Photographer of the Crimean War<\/em>, London: Secker & Warburg, 1954. Hardcover (silver-stamped red cloth), 10 x 7 \u00bd inches, 106 pages, 85 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                              This is the first book on Roger Fenton (1819-1869), a leading British nineteenth-century photographer. He took up photography in 1851 and a few years later was largely responsible for founding what is now the Royal Photographic Society. He photographed the Royal Family, the Crimean War, and worked for the British Museum. In 1862 he abandoned photography and resumed practicing law, his initial profession. The Gernsheims cover Fenton\u2019s entire career, but most of the reproductions are of his Crimean pictures (his most famous body of work), which are bolstered by the text of many letters he wrote home during the excursion in 1855. In unusually nice condition (near fine), the dustjacket has minor rubbing, tiny edgewear, and one short tear. $100<\/p>\n

                                               <\/p>\n

                                                \n
                                              1. CUBA. EVANS, Walker. <\/strong>Carleton Beals, The Crime of Cuba<\/em>, Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1933. Hardcover (silver-stamped black cloth), 9 x 6 inches, 506 pages, 31 halftone illustrations. Second printing.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                Beals\u2019s expos\u00e9 on Cuba\u2019s struggles for independence; the tangled relationship between its government, American financiers, and the U.S. State Department, plus the life of everyday Cubans of all classes. Evans, on his first major commission, focuses on the street life of vendors, families, laborers, and newsboys. But for punch, he throws in a few newspaper photographs of fatal victims of political violence. Missing the rare dustjacket, light rubbing to covers and top and bottom of spine, and tape residue on the title and copyright pages. $125<\/p>\n

                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                  \n
                                                1. CUBA. WRIDE, Tim B. <\/strong>Shifting Tides: Cuban Photography After the Revolution<\/em>, London: Merrell, 2001. Hardcover (black and blind-stamped red cloth), 11 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 160 pages, duotone and color halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                  This is the first comprehensive investigation of the subject, highlighting the work of three generations of Cuban photographers after Fidel Castro came to power in 1959. It charts the evolution of the medium \u201cfrom images of the 1960s and 1970s that celebrate the common man, through the experimental reclamations of personal history realized in the 1980s, to the intensely individualized conceptual investigations of the present.\u201d Korda (Alberto Diaz Guti\u00e9rrez) is represented by the book\u2019s most recognizable image\u2014of Che Guevara\u2014and many other, younger, photographers also contribute images. With an essay by Cristina Vives and preface by Wim Wenders; all text bilingual in Spanish and English. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                  \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                    \n
                                                  1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. BALAJKA, Peter, <\/strong>editor, Encyklopedie <\/em>\u010c<\/em>esk\u00fdch a Slovensk\u00fdch Fotografu<\/em>, Prague, Czech Republic: ASCO, 1993. Hardcover (black-stamped yellow cloth), 9 \u00bd x 6 \u00be inches, 456 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                    This is an extensive biographical encyclopedia of Czech and Slovak photographers, the first of its kind. Spanning the entire history of photography, it features over 600 entries, from Ludov\u00edt Absolon to Peter Zupn\u00edk, and about 700 reproductions. Also included is a section on photography clubs, a chronology, and bibliography. In addition to Balajka, the contributors are Vladim\u00edr Burgus, Anton\u00edn Dufek, and four other scholars. Though the text is in Czech, it is still a valuable reference tool. This copy signed and dated by the editor. Fine condition. $125<\/p>\n

                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                      \n
                                                    1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. CAPEK, Karel.<\/strong> Dashenka: The Life of a Puppy<\/em>. London: George Allen and Unwin Ltd., 1949. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, 76 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Third impression.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                      Originally issued in Czechoslovaka in 1933, this is the playful tale of a terrier puppy and its youthful transgressions. It pictures Dashenka with various predictable props, like a shoe. The text includes a short chapter on how to photograph a puppy and fairy tales to make her sit still. The book was \u201cwritten, drawn, photographed, and endured\u201d by Capek (1890-1938), a leading Czech author, who was known for his science fiction and introducing the word \u201crobot.\u201d Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                        \n
                                                      1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. Castles in Czechoslovakia<\/em><\/strong>, Prague: Artia, 1962. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 11 x 9 \u00bd inches, 154 pages, screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                        The book covers castles dating from the Middle Ages to 19th-century romanticism, in nearly 100 locations.\u00a0\u00a0 Chosen by Josef Ehm, the photographs are by him, Alexej Kusak, Karel Plicka, and Josef Sudek. Cloth shows some sunning along the edges and a small stain, in dustjacket that is chipped and missing small pieces. $35<\/p>\n

                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                          \n
                                                        1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. Ceskoslovenska Fotografie 1937<\/em><\/strong>, Prague: Svaz Ceskoslovenskych Klubu Fotografu Amat\u00e9ru, 1937. Hardcover (blue and black-stamped cream cloth), 11 x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 64 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                          Volume seven of the most important annual of Czechoslovakian photography, which lasted only about ten years. Features full-page images by leading figures such as Josef Ehm, Jan Lauschmann, and Eugen Wiskovsky, chosen by a jury that included Jaromir Funke and others. Lists an index to Czech photographic societies, and the editor\u2019s introduction in both Czech and English. Covers soiled and spine loose. $50<\/p>\n

                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                            \n
                                                          1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. Ceskoslovenska Fotografie 1938<\/em><\/strong>, Prague: Svaz Ceskoslovenskych Klubu Fotografu Amat\u00e9ru, 1938. Hardcover (red and black-stamped cream cloth), 11 x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 64 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                            Volume eight, similar in format to the above. Among the contributors are Jaromir Funke, Jan Lukas, Karel Plicka, D. J. Ruzicka, and Josef Sudek. Covers soiled and lightly worn. $75<\/p>\n

                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                              \n
                                                            1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. CHOCHOLA, V\u00e1clav. <\/strong>Jiri Kol\u00e1r, V\u00e1clav Chochola: Fotografie z let 1940-1960<\/em>, Prague: S.N.K.L.H.U., 1961. Softcover, 7 x 6 inches, 88 pages, 62 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                              The first monograph on Chochola (born 1923), issued while he was less than forty years old and presumably with his input. It includes an essay on him, bibliography, biography and the plates. Text in Czech. Covers worn, torn, detached, and missing part of spine. $35<\/p>\n

                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                \n
                                                              1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. Czech Modernism: 1900-1945<\/em><\/strong>, Houston: Museum of Fine Arts, 1990. Hardcover (copper-stamped blue cloth), 12 x 9 inches, 264 pages, 142 duotone and halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket. Signed ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                This is an authoritative study of Czech modern art, including painting, sculpture, and film, with an emphasis on photography. It was a groundbreaking project, with text by both American and Czech experts, and many biographies, the text all in English. Laid in is both a flyer and invitation to the exhibition in Houston, the latter signed by six of the book\u2019s authors. Near fine condition. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                  \n
                                                                1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. DRTIKOL, Franti\u0161ek.<\/strong> Franti\u0161ek Drtikol<\/em>, Prague: Pressfoto, 1981. Folder, 12 x 9 \u00bd inches, 12-page booklet, 12 copy gelatin silver prints.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                  The prints scan Drtikol\u2019s career, including landscapes, still lifes, portraits, and his important nudes from the 1930s. There are three of the latter, dramatically posed and lit. Text by curator Katerina Klaricov\u00e1, printed in Czech, German, Russian, French, and English. Two plates with faint spotting, in folder with minor edgewear and browning. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                    \n
                                                                  1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. DRTIKOL, Franti\u0161ek.<\/strong> Katerina Klaricov\u00e1, Franti\u0161ek Drtikol<\/em>, Prague: Panorama, 1989. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 10 \u00be x 9 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 108 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                    Published just before Czechoslovakia broke free from the Soviet Union, this monograph remains a rich visual resource on Drtikol, the country\u2019s leading exponent of nude photography. All of the reproductions are full color, reveling the richness of his pigment prints. Drtikol (1883-1961) vies with Josef Sudek for being the most influential twentieth-century Czech photographer, and is universally revered for his modernist nudes. While the book\u2019s main text is in Czech, it includes summaries in English and other languages. Tiny shelf wear, in near fine dustjacket. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                      \n
                                                                    1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. DRTIKOL, Franti\u0161ek.<\/strong> Anna F\u00e1rov\u00e1, Franti\u0161ek Drtikol: Art-Deco Photographer<\/em>, Munich, Germany: Schirmer Art Books, 1993. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 \u00bd inches, 200 pages, 181 duotone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                      An in-depth examination of Drtikol\u2019s adventuresome nude studies. All made in his studio, often with dramatic lighting and custom props, they are the pinnacle of Czech modernist figure work. F\u00e1rov\u00e1, the country\u2019s senior photo historian, breaks down the photographer\u2019s life and work into thematic and chronological sections, from 1883 to 1961. Mint condition, in shrink wrap. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                        \n
                                                                      1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. DRTIKOL, Franti\u0161ek.<\/strong> Vladimir Birgus, Fotograf Franti\u0161ek Drtikol<\/em>, Prague: Postor, 1994. Hardcover (black-stamped white cloth), 12 x 8 \u00bd inches, 206 pages, 128 halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                        Czech photographic historian Birgus\u2019 take on Drtikol\u2019s work, mostly his well-known studio nudes. Also includes reproductions of some of the artist\u2019s paintings and a dozen of his signatures and chopmarks. Text in Czech, with summaries in French, German, and English. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is lightly wrinkled and rubbed. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                        \u00a0<\/em><\/p>\n

                                                                          \n
                                                                        1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. DRTIKOL, Franti\u0161ek. <\/strong>Franti\u0161ek Drtikol: 1883-1961<\/em>, Prague: Museum of Decorative Arts, 2006. Folder, 16 \u00bd x 11 \u00be inches, 3 loose sheets, 3 illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                          This oversize folio was published on the occasion of an exhibition at the museum of photographs by Drtikol, from the years 1901-1914. The high-quality reproductions are tipped-on to the sheets, and present a self-portrait, a nude, and a river scene. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                            \n
                                                                          1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. FABER, Monika, and Josef Kroutvor.<\/strong> Photographie der Moderne in Prag, 1900-1925<\/em>, Shaffhausen, Germany: Edition Stemmle, 1991. Hardcover (gray paper over boards), 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00bd inches, 120 pages, halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                            This elegantly designed book examines the work of seven master photographers working in Prague at the beginning of the nineteenth century. Among them are Vladimir Bufka, Franti\u0161ek Drtikol, Karel Novak, Josef Sudek, and Josef Anton Tricka. The essays address Czech modernism and portraiture. Includes biographies on each, with samples of the photographers\u2019 signatures and stamps. Text in German. Near fine condition. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                              \n
                                                                            1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. FUNKE, Jaromir.<\/strong> Jarimor Funke<\/em>, Cologne, Germany: Rudolf Kicken Galerie, 1984. Softcover, 10 \u00bc x 7 \u00bd inches, 32 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                              Dealer\u2019s catalog, with a foreword by Anna Farova and Funke\u2019s 1940 article \u201cFrom the Photogram to Emotion.\u201d Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                              \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                \n
                                                                              1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. FUNKE, Jaromir.<\/strong> Jaromir Funke and the Amateur Avant-Garde<\/em>, Washington, D.C.: National Gallery of Art, 2009. Brochure, 9 \u00bd x 6 inches, 12 panels, 12 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                Exhibition brochure that covers work by 24 Czech photographers, among them Miroslav Hak, Tibor Honty, Jaroslav Krupka, and Eugen Wiskovsky. Text by Matthew W. Witkovsky. Near fine condition. $10<\/p>\n

                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                  \n
                                                                                1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. HONTY, Tibor. <\/strong>Tibor Honty<\/em>, Prague: Pressfoto, 1980. Paper folder, 12 x 9 \u00bd inches, 16-page pamphlet, 12 loose sheets.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                  This is the fifth in a series of portfolios of the work of leading Czech photographers. Honty\u2019s images depict landscapes, still lifes, sculpture, and public events. The pamphlet has an essay by Jiri Masin and chronology, in Czech, Russian, German, French, and English. Honty (1907-1968) was a major twentieth-century Czech photographer from the 1930s to about 1960. He was a member of M\u00e1nes and worked primarily freelance. Honty achieved internationally fame for his personal interpretations of sculpture, but also made documentary, journalistic, and Surrealistic images. Near fine condition, in original clear belly band. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                    \n
                                                                                  1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. JENICEK, Jiri. <\/strong>Anna Farova, Prague: S.N.K.LH.U., 1962. Softcover, 7 x 6 \u00bc inches, 82 pages, 63 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                    Small monograph on Jenicek (1895-1963), a street and landscape photographer, who also made films. Covers worn and detached. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                      \n
                                                                                    1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. KOUDELKA, Josef. <\/strong>Gypsies<\/em>, Millerton, New York: Aperture, 1975. Hardcover (blind and silver-stamped brown cloth), 11 x 12 inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket. First printing.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                      Koudelka\u2019s first and still most revered book. He made most of the images in East Slovakian gypsy settlements in the early 1960s. Short text by John Szarkowski and Czech photo historian Anna F\u00e1rov\u00e1. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is rubbed and with tiny edgewear. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                        \n
                                                                                      1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. LANDISCH, Bohumil. <\/strong>Praha: Matka Mest<\/em>, Prague: Olympia, 1969. Hardcover (gold and gray-stamped cream cloth), 12 \u00bd x 9 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 161 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                        A nice picture book dedicated to primarily the architecture and streets of Prague. With a brief introduction by Farntisek Kozik (in Czech, German, French, and English). Captions, in all four languages, give historical information about the subjects of the photographs. Top and bottom of spine bumped, in dustjacket that is worn and wrinkled. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                          \n
                                                                                        1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. LAUSCHMANN, Jan. <\/strong>Daniela Mr\u00e1zkov\u00e1, Jan Lauschmann<\/em>, Prague: Press-Foto, 1984. Folder, 11 \u00be x 9 \u00bd inches, 12 screen-gravure plates and 16-page booklet. Signed by Mr\u00e1zkov\u00e1.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                          The images, all from the 1920s and 1930s, are either soft-focus street scenes in Prague or modernist images often made from an unusual viewpoint. They include Lauschmann\u2019s most recognizable picture, \u201cThe Cliff,\u201d which shows an isolated tree growing on a rocky outcropping. The booklet\u2019s text is in Czech, Russian, German, French, and English. Jan Lauschmann (1901-1991) was a modernist Czech photographer, related to D. J. Ruzicka. Produced in high-quality gravure in an edition of 2,500 copies. This copy signed by Mr\u00e1zkov\u00e1. Fine condition, with the original cellophane bellyband. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                            \n
                                                                                          1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. LAUSCHMANN, Jan. <\/strong>Daniela Mr\u00e1kov\u00e1, Jan Lauschmann<\/em>, Prague: Odeon, 1986. Softcover, 7 x 6 \u00bc inches, 150 pages, 88 screen-gravure illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                            Small monograph on Lauschmann, with a chronology and bibliography. Summaries printed in Russian and English. This copy signed by the author. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                              \n
                                                                                            1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. LUKAS, Jan. <\/strong>Light and Shade<\/em>, London: Lincoln-Prager, 1947. Hardcover (red-stamped tan cloth), 12 \u00be x 9 \u00be inches, 76 pages, 64 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                              Edwin Muir begins his introduction by stating, \u201cIn this book, Mr. Jan Lukas has caught a succession of moments in the ordinary country life of Czechoslovakia. He has not searched for the rare or the spectacular, but rather for the typical as it reveals itself to an eye that can see profoundly into it and catch it by a happy chance.\u201d The rich gravures are presented full page, often bleeding off the edges. Lukas (1915-2006) was a prolific photographer who produced many illustrated books, this being his first. Wear to bottom of spine, in dustjacket that is worn and missing part of the back. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                              \u00a0<\/em><\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                \n
                                                                                              1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. Praha Objektivem Mistru<\/em><\/strong>, Prague: Panorama, 1983. Hardcover (gray-stamped gray cloth), 11 x 9 \u00bd inches, 248 pages, screen-gravure and color halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                Prague Through the Lens of Masters<\/em> features the work of 15 photographers and text by Ludvik Baran. Among those contributing images of the city are Ruzicka, Lauschamnn, Wiskovsky, Funke, Sudek, Honty, and Ehm. Include summary text in Russian, German, French, and English. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is lightly rubbed and wrinkled. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. REICHMANN, Vilem. <\/strong>Vilem Reichmann<\/em>, Prague: Press Foto, 1984. Folder, 11 \u00be x 9 \u00bd inches, 12-page booklet, 12 loose plates.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                  The booklet features an essay by Alena Slachtova, in Czech, Russian, German, French, and English. The screen-printed plates show primarily Reichmann\u2019s architectural and abstract images. His most famous one, of vines growing over the midsection of a nude female statue is presented on the cover of both the folder and the booklet. Near fine condition, with the original clear belly band. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                  1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. RUZICKA, D. J. <\/strong>Daniela Mr\u00e1zkova and Christian A. Peterson, The Modern Pictorialism of D. J. Ruzicka<\/em>, Prague: Galerie Hlavniho Mesta Prahy, 1990. Hardcover (silver-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00bd x 8 \u00bc inches, 112 pages, 56 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                    This is the only monograph on Ruzicka produced after his death, on the occasion of an exhibition seen in both Prague and the United States. Mr\u00e1zkova writes about his importance to Czech photography and Peterson covers him as an American pictorialist. The images survey his work from 1909 to 1951, including four images of Pennsylvania Station and two of the 1939 New York World\u2019s Fair. All text bilingual, in Czech and English. Gravure printed in an edition of 2,000 copies. Fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                    1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SAUDEK, Jan.<\/strong> Jan Saudek: Life, Love, Death & Other Such Trifles<\/em>, Amsterdam: Art Unlimited, 1991. Hardcover (black cloth),<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                      12 \u00be x 9 \u00be inches, 160 pages, halftone illustrations (most in color), dustjacket.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                      Features an essay by Michel Tournier, some text by the photographer, and an artist\u2019s chronology. According to the flap, \u201cJan Saudek has an artistic shamelessness which makes his work almost provocatively beautiful. For example, he is not afraid to show his preference for the sentimental, he likes to use the artificial, and he has no trouble allowing the color of kitsch or the atmosphere of the 19th-century erotic postcard.\u201d Many of the images are set in Saudek\u2019s basement studio, with a window and ragged walls, and hand-colored. All text in English. Mint condition, in shrink wrap. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                      1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SAUDEK, Jan.<\/strong> Pair of original photographs. Gelatin silver prints, 3 \u00be x 4 \u00be inches each.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                        These small prints presents two heavy-set women reading an 1884 poster on a wall. Like other pairs by Saudek, the figures are clothed in one picture and nude in the other. Seen from behind, their behinds are prominent, and each holds cleaning tools, like a bucket. Saudek frequently made his images look antique, by toning them brown and lopping off a corner (to suggest a broken glass plate), elements present here. Light rubbing to surfaces. Images sent upon request. Pair: $1,000<\/p>\n

                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                        1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. STYRSKY, Jindrich. <\/strong>Emilie Comes to Me in a Dream<\/em>, New York: Ubu Gallery, 1997. Softcover, 8 \u00bd x 5 \u00bd inches, 36 pages, 12 color halftone illustrations. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                          In 1933 Styrsky produced his masterpiece Emilie Prichazi ka Mne ve Snu<\/em> as a book of ten photomontages in a deliberately small edition (69 copies) in order to elude censors. It showed male and female genitalia combined with fish, water, and a skeleton; a woman masturbating; and couples and a threesome having sex, against the starry heavens and oversize human eyes. Photographer Jindrich Styrsky (1899-1942) was also a painter, stage and book designer, illustrator, and writer. He joined the Czech avant-garde group Devetsil in 1923 and worked in the late twenties in Paris, where he assimilated Surrealist themes and motifs. Back in Prague, he coedited and contributed to Erotic Review<\/em> from 1930 to 1933, and exhibited in many international Surrealist exhibitions until World War II. In 1938 a retrospective of his work (along with fellow Czech artist Toyen) was shown in Prague, Brno, and Bratislava. Czech photo historian Vladimir Birgus noted that \u201cStyrsky\u2019s unusual openness toward sexual themes hastened his unprecedented, forceful imagination toward extremely potent visions that had an immediate effect on the young generation.\u201d<\/p>\n

                                                                                                          A copy of the original book sold at Christie\u2019s New York in 2008 for $193,000, and it is included in Andrew Roth\u2019s The Book of 101 Books: Seminal Photographic Books of the Twentieth Century<\/em>. The present copy is a reprint, with the photographer\u2019s introduction and Bohuslav Brouk\u2019s afterword translated into English. The Ubu Gallery produced it in conjunction with a 1997 exhibition of Styrsky\u2019s original collages, printed in an edition of 1,000 copies. This copy with the gallery\u2019s card announcement of the show in a black plastic envelop with a sticker attached warning \u201cDiscretion Advised! Sexually Explicit Material Enclosed.\u201d Fine condition. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                          1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong> Lubomir Linhart, Josef Sudek: Fotografie<\/em>, Prague, Czechoslovakia: St\u00e1tn\u00ed Nakladatelstv\u00ed Kr\u00e1sn\u00e9 Literatury, Hudby a Um\u00e9n\u00ed, 1956. Hardcover (black-stamped cream cloth), 9 \u00bd x 6 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 232 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                            This dense book features Linhart\u2019s text and a rich selection of images, made between 1915 and 1954 and printed in high-quality gravure, by the Czech Republic\u2019s most famous photographer. Features his landscapes, portraits, still lifes, cityscapes, and a few fold-out panoramas. The cloth and dustjacket sport Sudek\u2019s name nicely designed in a block of modernist type. This title was actually a book-club item, not available in stores, and printed in the surprisingly large edition of thirty thousand copies. Nonetheless, it is not common in the West and remains the most preferred book on him. Light wear to dustjacket. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                            1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong>Camera<\/em>, July 1967.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                              An issue of the quality Swiss periodical, with one portfolio dedicated to Sudek. His pictures are eight panoramic landscapes, printed in screen-gravure and presented on gatefold pages. Text by editor Allan Porter, in French. Very good condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                              1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong>Josef Sudek<\/em>, Toulouse, France: Galerie Municipale du Chateu d\u2019Eau, 1981. Softcover, 8 \u00bc x 8 \u00bc inches, 24 pages, 22 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                Exhibition catalog, with short essays by Anna Farova and J. Dieuzaide and an artist\u2019s chronology. Text in French. Near fine condition. $15<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong> Zdenek Kirschner, Josef Sudek<\/em>, Prague: Panorama, 1982. Hardcover (red and blind-stamped black cloth), 11 x<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                  9 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 160 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Signed by author.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                  This is the most widely known Czech book on Sudek, produced shortly after his death when Czechoslovakia was still under Communist rule. Dr. Kirschner knew Sudek personally and was the curator of photographs at Prague\u2019s museum of decorative arts, which houses a large collection of the photographer\u2019s work. Includes a rich selection of images. While the main text is in Czech, there are summaries in French, German, Russian, and English. This copy signed by Kirschner. Light wear to tips and edges, in lightly wrinkled dustjacket. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                  1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong>Anna Farova, Josef Sudek, Poet of Prague: A Photographer\u2019s Life<\/em>, New York: Aperture, 1990. Hardcover (silver-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00be inches, 160 pages, duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                    A heavily illustrated examination of Sudek, by Farova, the preeminent Czech historian of photography. It includes a bibliography and listing of Sudek exhibitions, and also appeared as two consecutive issues of Aperture<\/em> magazine. Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket that is rubbed and with a few indentations on the front. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                    1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong>Praha Panoramaticka<\/em>, Prague: Odeon, 1992. Hardcover (black-stamped white cloth), 9 x 13 \u00bd inches, 296 pages, 284 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                      This is a reprint of the original 1959 edition that was rendered in gravure. Sudek undoubtedly influenced the selection and sequencing of the images, making it something of an artist\u2019s book and definitely one of the most important publications on panoramic photography. The images, both vertical and horizontal, picture the Czech landscape and streets and architecture of Sudek\u2019s beloved Praha. Near fine condition. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                      1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong>Zdenek Kirschner, Josef Sudek<\/em>, New York: Takarajima Books, 1993. Hardcover (black-stamped brown cloth), 14 x<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                        10 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 237 duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                        Another admirable survey of the photographer\u2019s work, but presented in a large format, \u201cthe first full-scale representation of Sudek\u2019s poetic genius.\u201d In addition to the introductory essay Dr. Kirschner also provides notes to many of the images and a selected chronology. Mint condition, in shrink wrap. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                        1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong>Jan Rezac, Josef Sudek: Slovnik Misto Pameti<\/em>, Prague: Artfoto, 1994. Softcover, 7 x 6 \u00bc inches, 104 pages, 37 duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                          This is a modest overview of Sudek\u2019s life and work. Text in Czech with summaries in German and English. Fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                          1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef. <\/strong>Anna Farova, Josef Sudek<\/em>, Munich, Germany: Kehayoff, 1999. Hardcover (black-stamped paper over boards), 13 \u00bc x 10 \u00bd inches, 408 pages, duotone illustrations, clear dustjacket and slipcase.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                            This is a substantial volume on Sudek, written by an important Czech historian. Farova covers the photographer\u2019s life and work in fifteen chronological and stylistic chapters. The distinctive cover features gold paper and a tipped-on reproduction. Text in English. Light edgewear and a few bumped corners (not uncommon, due to the book\u2019s size and weight). $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                            1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SUDEK, Josef.\u00a0\u00a0 <\/strong>Josef Sudek and Czech Photography<\/em>, Minneapolis Institute of Arts, 2009. Softcover, 11 x 7 \u00bd inches, 20 pages, 14 halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                              Exhibition catalog, with text by curator Christian A. Peterson, that covers the work of a dozen photographers. Includes reproductions by Eva Fuka, Vilem Reichmann, Jaroslav Rossler, Jan Saudek, and others. Fine condition. $15<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                              1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. SVOBODA, Jan. <\/strong>Petr Balajka, Jan Svoboda<\/em>, Prague: Odeon, 1991. Softcover, 7 x 6 inches, 168 pages, 104 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                Published a year after the death of Svoboda (1934-1990), this monograph covers his life and work, with summary texts in English and other languages. Most of the images are still lifes or abstract images from the 1960s to 1980s. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. VSETECKA, Jiri. <\/strong>Prazsky Chodec<\/em>, Prague: Pressfoto, 1985. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 8 \u00bd x 9 \u00bc inches, 202 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                  The title translates as \u201cPrague Walker,\u201d a piece by the Czech poet Vitezslav Nezval. Inspired by Nezval\u2019s writings, Vsetecka presents a visual pedestrian journey through the city. Prominent are Prague\u2019s people, streets, and the built environment, often rendered with the photographer\u2019s commentary. Text summaries in Russian, German, French, and English. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is worn, torn, and wrinkled. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                  1. CZECHOSLOVAKIA. What is Photography: 150 Years of Photography<\/em><\/strong>, Prague: M\u00e1nes, 1989. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 \u00be inches, 392 pages, halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                    Issued only in softcover, this is the catalog for Czechoslovakia\u2019s celebration of a century and a half of photography. Co je Fotografie: 150 Let Fotografie<\/em> in Czech, it features hundreds of images arranged in five chronological and stylistic sections and essays by ten Czech scholars. While the book covers photography from around the world, it ends with a section devoted to about 150 Czech photographers working from 1945 to 1989. All of the essays are bilingual, in English and Czech. Near fine condition. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                    1. EGYPT. BULL, Deborah, <\/strong>and <\/strong>Donald Lorimer. <\/strong>Up the Nile: A Photographic Excursion: Egypt, 1839-1898<\/em>, New York: Clarkson N. Potter, 1979. Hardcover (brown-stamped white cloth), 8 \u00be x 11 \u00bc inches, 140 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                      With a foreword by Sotheby Parke Bernet\u2019s photography expert, Anne Horton, this volume takes the reader on a visual journey from Cairo south (upstream on the River Nile, to all of Egypt\u2019s major monuments. It features pictures of the sphinx, pyramids, and other subjects, by Antonio Beato, Felix Bonfils, Maxime Du Camp, Francis Firth, J. B. Greene, Felix Tenyard, and about twenty other pioneering workers. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                      1. EGYPT. DU CAMP, Maxime. <\/strong>Bodo von Dewitz and Karin Schuller-Procopovici, Die Reise zum Nile, 1849-1850: Maxime Du Camp und Gustave Flaubert in Agypten, Palastina und Syria<\/em>, G\u00f6ttingen, Germany: Steidl, 1997. Hardcover (white-printed paper over boards), 11 x 9 \u00bd inches, 228 pages, 137 duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                        Here we have an in-depth examination of the important, early excursion of Du Camp and fellow author Gustave Flaubert to Egypt, Palestine, and Syria, in the middle of the nineteenth century. Maxime Du Camp (1822-1894) learned photography from Gustav Le Gray shortly before his departure from Paris and returned with over two hundred paper negatives. He wrote a book about the trip, illustrated with his own salt prints, which were widely admired at the time and are highly prized today. Perhaps the most memorable one depicts a diminutive figure perched on the crown of the stone-cut sculpture of Pharaoh Ramesses II at Abu Simbel, largely buried in sand (reproduced on the dustjacket here). Text in German. Top of spine and dustjacket lightly bumped. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                        1. EGYPT. FRITH, Francis.<\/strong> Jean Vercoutter, L\u2019Egypte \u00e0 la Chambre Noire: Francis Frith, Photographe de l\u2019Egypte Retrouv\u00e9e<\/em>, Italy: Editions Gallimard, 2002. Hardcover (white and blind-stamped paper over boards), 9 \u00bd x 11 \u00bc inches, 128 pages, 58 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                          Vercoutter and curator Pamela Roberts provide brief introductions, after which are pairs of full-page reproductions and descriptions of the scenes. They traverse the River Nile from the pyramids at Giza to the fifth cataract in Nubia. Text in Italian. Near fine condition. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                          1. EGYPT. FRITH, Francis.<\/strong> Douglas R. Nickel, Francis Frith in Egypt and Palestine: A Victorian Photographer Abroad<\/em>, Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 2004. Hardcover (gold-stamped brown cloth spine and paper over boards), 11 \u00bc x 10 inches, 240 pages, 85 duotones illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                            This is the most complete and scholarly monograph on the great Mr. Frith. It features an insightful essay, high-quality reproductions, and an elegant design. Mint condition, in shrink wrap. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                            1. EGYPT. FRITH, Francis.<\/strong> Richard Lunn, Francis Frith\u2019s Egypt and the Holy Land: The Pioneering Photographic Expeditions to the Middle East<\/em>, Teffont, Salisbury, England: Francis Frith Collection, 2005. Hardcover (gold-stamped paper over boards), 9 \u00bc x 11 inches, 234 pages, halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                              Lunn covers Frith as a pioneer photographer and explorer, the technical aspects of his images and their publication, and then gives an account of following Frith\u2019s footsteps through modern Egypt. Reproductions of Frith\u2019s albumen prints are presented with maps, his writings, and recent color images of the same places. Near fine condition. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                              1. EGYPT. HOWE, Kathleen Stewart.<\/strong> Excursions Along the Nile: The Photographic Discovery of Ancient Egypt<\/em>, Santa Barbara Museum of Art, 1993. Hardcover (gold-stamped brown cloth), 11 \u00bc x 10 \u00be inches, 176 pages, 115 duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                Dr. Howe examines the exploration of Egypt by photographers during the nineteenth century, by discussing the country\u2019s attraction, early hand-illustrated books, pilgrims and adventurers, photographing by calotype and wet-collodion, and the marketing and packaging of both the photographs and the country. Features work by Maxime Du Camp, F\u00e9lix Teynard, J. B. Greene, Francis Frith, and others. Collector Michael G. Wilson, who provided most of the prints, writes notes to selected plates. A focused and nicely presented publication. Near fine condition. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                1. EGYPT. Salt and Paper: Photography in Egypt from the 1850s<\/em><\/strong>, Munich, Germany: Galerie Daniel Blau, 2001. Softcover, 6 \u00bd x 9 \u00bd inches, 32 pages, 24 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                  A selection of vintage salt and albumen prints, presented by the Blau Gallery at Brooke Alexander Editions in New York. Comprises work by only Maxime Du Camp and Francis Frith, with biographies and full-page reproductions. Printed in an edition of 500 copies. Fold to one corner, affecting cover and first few pages. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                  1. EGYPT. PARKHURST, Richard. <\/strong>A Vacation on the Nile: A Collection of Letters Written to Friends at Home<\/em>, Boston: Athenaeum Press, 1913. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 9 x 6 \u00bc inches, 120 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                    As indicated in the subtitle, the text comprises correspondence that the author sent to friends back in the United States while he was traveling along the River Nile, in 1912. Among the sites described and seen in photographs (supplied by both the author and T. W. Gilson) are the Propylon at Edfu, Temple of Philae, Steppe Pyramid, and Athenian Treasury at Delphi. Most of the reproductions are framed by a border of Egyptian design and the gold-printed cover features a sailboat inside a nice border of abstracted flowers. Privately printed in an edition of 500 copies and probably issued without a dustjacket. Previous owner\u2019s name and tiny wear to cover edges. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                    1. EGYPT. TEYNARD, F\u00e9lix.<\/strong> F\u00e9lix Teynard \u201cEgypte et Nubie, 1853-54:\u201d The Photographer\u2019s Personal Copy<\/em>, London: Christie\u2019s, 1994. Softcover, 10 \u00bd x 8 \u00bc inches, 28 pages, 12 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                      The is the auction catalog for the sale of Teynard\u2019s only known production, a two-volume set on the monuments of Egypt and Nubia, containing 160 calotype photographs (salted paper prints). It was extra illustrated with a portrait of him and included a hand-written inscription. F\u00e9lix Teynard (1817-1892) was a French civil engineer who was among the first to photograph extensively in the inhospitable region of the Near East. He is \u201cwidely acknowledged as having produced the most aesthetically advanced work of the period.\u201d Near fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. ABNEY, William de Wiveleslie.<\/strong> Handwritten letter, 7 x 4 \u00bd inches, 4 panels, c. 1895.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                        On his letterhead of Rathmore Lodge in London\u2019s fashionable South Kensington borough, the letter is dated February 18 and addressed to a Mrs. Clark. In it, Abney thanks her for her letter and discusses his books and travel plans to Ireland. Accompanied by Abney\u2019s 20-page article \u201cPhotography,\u201d extracted from the 1905 edition of The Encyclopedia Britannica<\/em>. Captain Sir William Abney (1843-1920) invented printing-out paper and wrote over twenty books on photographic technique. In 1876, he published the book Thebes and its Five Greater Temples<\/em>, with woodburytypes of Egypt, and he later served as president of London\u2019s Photographic Society. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. ARNOLD, Eve.<\/strong> The Great British<\/em>, New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1991. Hardcover (copper-stamped blue cloth), 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 100 halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                          Arnold, a major Magnum photographer, turns her camera on the people of Great Britain, her adopted country, during the 1960s and seventies. She provides her own text and pictures both common folk, such as a gunsmith and a butler, and the famous. Among the known faces are Queen Elizabeth, Vanessa Redgrave, Richard Burton, and Margaret Thatcher. Laid in is the New York Times<\/em> obituary for Arnold, January 6, 2012, on original newsprint. Near fine condition, in rubbed dustjacket. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. BARTON, Emma.<\/strong> Peter James and others, Sunlight and Shadow: The Photographs of Emma Barton, 1872-1938<\/em>, Birmingham, England: Birmingham Libraries and Birmingham Museums and Art Gallery, 1995. Softcover, 10 x 8 inches, 102 pages, 28 halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                            This is the catalog for an exhibition of photographs by and material related to Barton. It includes portraits of her family members, ephemera, photographs by other pictorialists, and Barton\u2019s own pictures of children, the \u201cKodak Girls,\u201d and other subjects. Working from the turn of the twentieth century until about 1930, Emma Barton (1872-1938) produced mostly figure studies and portraits, in black and white and as Autochrome color plates. She presented a solo show at the Royal Photographic Society (London) in 1901 and later exhibited at the Birmingham Photographic Society and in the American Photographic Salons, which traveled around the United States. Fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND. BARTRAM, Michael. <\/strong>The Pre-Raphaelite Camera: Aspects of Victorian Photography<\/em>, London: Weidenfeld and Nicholson, 1985. Hardcover (gold-stamped brown cloth), 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00bc inches, 200 pages, 179 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                              This is an insightful examination of the Pre-Raphaelite painters use of the camera and the movement\u2019s influence on photographers in their subject matter and approach. Among the photographers covered are Julia Margaret Cameron, Lewis Carroll, Oscar G. Rejlander, and Henry Peach Robinson. Artists covered include William Holman Hunt, John Millais, and Dante Gabriel Rossetti. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                              1. ENGLAND. BEATON, Cecil. <\/strong>British Photographers<\/em>, London: William Collins, 1944. Hardcover (paper over boards), 9 x 6 \u00bd inches, 48 pages, 35 screen-gravure and 5 color halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                This slender volume, part of the series \u201cBritain in Pictures,\u201d features Beaton\u2019s take on historic and contemporary British photography. He includes work by nineteenth-century figures such as William Henry Fox Talbot, Roger Fenton, and Julia Margaret Cameron; the art photographers O. G. Rejlander and Henry Peach Robinson; World War II combat pictures, and, shamelessly, some of his own portraits. The images are printed in high-quality gravure, except for the color halftones. Minor edgewear to the book and dustjacket. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                1. ENGLAND. BRANDT, Bill. <\/strong>The English at Home<\/em>, London: Batsford, 1936. Hardcover (paper over boards), 9 \u00bd x 7 \u00bd inches, 72 pages, 63 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                  Brandt\u2019s first book, showing his fellow countrymen, of all classes, going about their daily business and pleasures, in quality gravure. Part of title page missing, previous owner\u2019s inscription, covers worn, and one bumped corner throughout. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                  1. ENGLAND. BRANDT, Bill. <\/strong>Camera in London<\/em>, London: Focal Press, 1948. Hardcover (yellow-stamped paper over boards), 9 \u00be x 7 inches, 96 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                    After his own introduction, Brandt groups images: River, Homes, People, Kids, Air, Light, and the War. Light wear to cover, in price-clipped dustjacket that is worn, ripped, and missing a few small pieces. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                    1. ENGLAND. BRANDT, Bill. <\/strong>Literary Britain<\/em>, London: Cassell, 1951. Hardcover (red and gold-stamped blue cloth), 10 x 8 \u00bd inches, 212 pages, 100 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                      The results of Brandt traveling throughout Britain to capture scenes, buildings, and interiors associated with native writers of prose and verse, such as Jane Austin, Chaucer, and Shakespeare. Three corners lightly bumped, in dustjacket that has tears, wrinkles, and edgewear. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. BRANDT, Bill. <\/strong>Perspective of Nudes<\/em>, New York: Amphoto, 1961. Hardcover (red-stamped paper over boards), 11 x 9 \u00bd inches, 106 pages, 90 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                        Preface by Lawrence Durrell and introduction by Chapman Mortimer. Brandt\u2019s most revered book, with quality, gravure plates. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that has a few tears, is chipped and missing a small piece from the back. $1,500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. BRANDT, Bill.<\/strong> Shadow of Light<\/em>, London: Bodley Head, 1966. Hardcover (gold-stamped black paper over boards), 11 x 9 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 128 screen gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                          Includes an introduction by Cyril Connolly and notes on the photographs by Marjorie Beckett. Features five groups of Brandt\u2019s graphically strong images, dating from the 1930s to 1960s; \u201cLondon Before the War,\u201d \u201cNorthern Towns During the Depression,\u201d \u201cBlack-out Nights of the London Blitz,\u201d \u201cPortraits,\u201d and \u201cLandscapes and Nudes.\u201d They are rendered in high-quality gravure and include a small group of rather unusual color images of biomorphic rocks shot close up. Very light bumping to a few corners, in a dustjacket that is lightly stained, creased, torn and tape repaired. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. BRANDT, Bill. <\/strong>Bill Brandt: Nudes, 1945-1980<\/em>, Boston: New York Graphic Society, 1980. Hardcover (silver-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00bd x 10 inches, 114 pages, 100 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                            Introduction by Michael Hiley. Examples of Brandt\u2019s most important subject. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with a few chips. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND. BROWN, Arthur.<\/strong> Tennyson\u2019s Brook, Illustrated by Arthur Brown with Photographic Views<\/em>, Newcastle-upon-Tyne, England: Arthur Brown, 1879. Folder (gold-stamped green cloth), 10 \u00bd x 8 \u00bc inches, 13 mounted woodburytypes.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                              The photographer explains in a printed sheet that he decided to publish this portfolio after Alfred, Lord Tennyson wrote him in thanks after receiving a set of prints that illustrated his thirteen-verse poem The Brook<\/em>. Brown made the photographs along the Skelton Beck stream at Saltburn-by-the-Sea in Yorkshire. The images are rich, idyllic, and usually unpeopled. Tennyson\u2019s verse, written from the stream\u2019s viewpoint, ends, \u201cAnd out again I curve and flow\/To join the brimming river\/For men may come and men may go\/ But I go on forever.\u201d The 4-x-3-inch prints are mounted on stiff printed boards. Mild wear to cover edges and tips. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                              1. ENGLAND. BURDEKIN, Harold. <\/strong>John Morrison, London Night<\/em>, London: Collins, 1934. Hardcover (silver-stamped blue cloth), 12 \u00bd x 10 inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                This large-scale picture book features very well-composed and richly rendered images (in blue gravure) of the city after dark. Not a single human form is to be found in them. The endpapers of this gorgeous book present a dramatic night sky. Morrison actually assisted Burdekin in making the photographs and the two were so confident of the artistic value of their pictures that, according to a laid-in slip, they offered signed original photographic prints of the pictures in the book. Previous owner\u2019s name and bookplate, one corner bumped, in a dustjacket with minor wear along the top. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                1. ENGLAND. CAMERON, Julia Margaret. <\/strong>Helmut Gernsheim, Julia Margaret Cameron: Pioneer of Photography<\/em>, London: Fountain Press, 1948. Hardcover (black-stamped yellow cloth), 9 \u00bd x 7 \u00bc inches, 140 pages, 52 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                  This is the first full-length study of the great English nineteenth-century portrait photographer. After the introduction by art critic Clive Bell, Gernsheim delves into Cameron\u2019s life, environment, and photographic work. Among the brown-toned plates, printed in high-quality gravure, are images of all her most famous sitters: Thomas Carlyle, Charles Darwin, Sir John Herschel, Alice Liddell (the original Alice in Wonderland), Henry Wadsworth Longfellow, Alfred Lord Tennyson, Ellen Terry, George Frederick Watts, and even herself. Dustjacket has a few tiny pieces missing and two tape-repaired tears. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ENGLAND. CAMERON, Julia Margaret.<\/strong> Brian Hill, Julia Margaret Cameron: A Victorian Family Portrait<\/em>, New York: St. Martin\u2019s Press, 1973. Hardcover (paper over boards), 9 x 5 \u00bd inches, 204 pages, 22 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                    An in-depth account of Cameron\u2019s life, family, friends, and photographic pursuits. Includes her family tree and bibliography. Near fine condition, in lightly rubbed and wrinkled dustjacket. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ENGLAND. CAMERON, Julia Margaret.<\/strong> Idylls of the King and Other Poems Photographically Illustrated by Julia Margaret Cameron, Text by Alfred Lord Tennyson<\/em>, New York: Janet Lehr, 1985. Softcover, 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, 52 pages, 26 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                      This is Volume 7, Numbers 1-2 of the regular sales catalogs that Lehr issued. It reproduces albumen images Cameron made in 1874 of various figures and scenes from Tennyson\u2019s Idylls<\/em>, accompanied by his text. Among those pictured are King Arthur, Guinevere, Lancelot, Merlin, and Vivien, all in elaborate Victorian costume and surroundings. Near fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. CAMERON, Julia Margaret.<\/strong> Joanne Lukitsh, Julia Margaret Cameron: Her Work and Career<\/em>, Rochester: International Museum of Photography at George Eastman House, 1986. Softcover, 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, 104 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                        Exhibition catalog covering Cameron\u2019s pictures of family, Madonnas and cherubs, \u201cIdylls of the King,\u201d and other portraits and illustrations. Spine faded with writing, light cover edgewear. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. CARROLL, Lewis.<\/strong> Morton N. Cohen, Lewis Carroll, Photographer of Children: Four Nude Studies<\/em>, Philadelphia: Rosenbach Foundation, and Clarkson N. Potter, 1979. Hardcover (brown-stamped yellow cloth), 10 x 7 inches, 32 pages, 4 color halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                          Examines just four pictures of nude girls by English writer Charles L. Dodgson (1832-1898), acquired by the Rosenbach Foundation in the 1950s. The images are heavily hand-worked, all but obscuring their photographic origins, and show the subjects on seashores, seated beside a tree, and in the studio. Carroll proclaimed that \u201cI have been largely privileged in t\u00eate-\u00e0-t\u00eate intercourse with children.\u201d Near fine condition, with one short tear to dustjacket. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. COBURN, Alvin Langdon.<\/strong> Ralph Nevill and Charles Edward Jerningham, Piccadilly to Pall Mall: Manners, Morals, and Man<\/em>, New York: E. P. Dutton, 1909. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth), 9 x 6 inches, 310 pages, 2 photogravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                            An entertaining account of clubs, music halls, society, and characters in London\u2019s West End from the 1850s to the early twentieth century. The photogravures are of one of Coburn\u2019s most celebrated subjects\u2014London. The frontispiece shows carriages in front of St. James\u2019 Place and the other one pictures the Empire Theatre at night, with lights ablaze and reflections on wet pavement. Alvin Langdon Coburn (1822-1966) became the youngest and one of the major members of the Photo-Secession. He was skilled at making gum-bichromate prints and photogravures, creating softly-focused images of the landscape, cities, and people, in both the United States and England. Light wear and scuffs to the cloth. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND. EDMONDSON, G. W.<\/strong> From Epworth to London with John Wesley, Being Fifty Photo-Engravings of the Sacred Places of Methodism<\/em>, Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe, 1890. Hardcover (gold and black-stamped brown cloth), 8 x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                              Edmondson ventured to England to take photographs of places important to John Wesley, the founder of the Methodist religion (\u201cMethodism\u201d), after he noticed that interest in Wesley\u2019s life and writings was waning in the late nineteenth century. Among them were Wesley\u2019s birthplace, homes, schools, pulpits, churches, and his London tomb. The straightforward images are accompanied by descriptive text by George John Stevenson. George W. Edmondson ran a portrait studio in Cleveland and in 1899 served as the president of the Photographers\u2019 Association of Ohio. Covers worn. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ENGLAND. EMERSON, Peter Henry.<\/strong> Naturalistic Photography for Students of the Art<\/em>, New York: Amphoto, 1972. Hardcover (silver-stamped green cloth),<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                7 \u00bd x 5 inches, 314 pages, unillustrated, dustjacket.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                This is a reprint of the 1890 second, revised edition of Emerson\u2019s defining treatise on naturalistic photography, a movement closely associated with pictorialism. In it he gives extensive technical instruction, shares his opinions about art, argues for photography as a means of creative expression, and explains his theory of differential focusing. This edition with an introduction by photography historian Peter Pollack. Writing on one flap, in a dustjacket that is chipped. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                1. ENGLAND. EMERSON, Peter Henry.<\/strong> Nancy Newhall, P. H. Emerson: The Fight for Photography as a Fine Art<\/em>, Millerton, New York: Aperture, 1975. Hardcover (silver-stamped green cloth), 9 \u00bc x 10 \u00be inches, 266 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                  The first major examination of Emerson, his life, work, influences, and legacy. Newhall drew heavily from such primary resources as Emerson correspondence and writings. Includes a chronology and bibliography. Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ENGLAND. EVANS, Frederick H.<\/strong> Beaumont Newhall, Frederick H. Evans<\/em>, Rochester: George Eastman House, 1964. Softcover, 10 \u00be x 8 inches, 48 pages, 19 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                    The first little monograph devoted to Evans has Newhall discussing Evans as a bookseller and artistic photographer, covering his trans-Atlantic relationship with Alfred Stieglitz, his involvement with the Royal Photographic Society and Linked Ring Brotherhood, and his glorious pictures of cathedral interiors. Commences with his most famous image, A Sea of Steps<\/em>, from Wells Cathedral in 1903. Frederick H. Evans (1853-1943) was one of England\u2019s most accomplished pictorialists around the turn of the twentieth century. His cathedral pictures concentrated on the light and spirit of the subjects, rather than the architecture per se, rendered as straight platinum prints, without overt manipulation. Near fine condition, with previous owner\u2019s address label. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ENGLAND. EVANS, Frederick H.<\/strong> Beaumont Newhall, Frederick H. Evans, Photographer of the Majesty, Light and Space of the Medieval Cathedrals of England and France<\/em>, Millerton, New York: Aperture, 1973. Hardcover (gray-stamped gray cloth), 10 \u00be x 9 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 75 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                      This hardcover includes Newhall\u2019s text from the above title (apparently unaltered), with an expanded set of images by Evans. For instance, there are more landscapes and portraits (of the likes of Evans\u2019 friend Aubrey Beardsley). Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket with a tear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. EVANS, Frederick H.<\/strong> Anne Hammond, editor, Frederick H. Evans: Selected Texts and Bibliography<\/em>, Boston: G. K. Hall, 1992. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth), 10 x 7 \u00be inches, 200 pages, 35 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                        Hammond commences with an introduction titled \u201cThe Soul of Architecture,\u201d which is followed by reprints of twenty articles by or on Evans written between 1902 and 1943, the year of his death. The photographer writes on critics, lantern slides, technique, his library, Wells Cathedral, and Julia Margaret Cameron. Among those writing on Evans are the critic Anthony Guest and fellow pictorialist A. Horsley Hinton. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is lightly rubbed with one short tear. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. FRITH, Francis.<\/strong> R. D. Blackmore, Lorna Doone: A Romance of Exmoor<\/em>, Philadelphia: John C. Winston, 1882. Hardcover (gold-stamped red cloth), 8 x 5 \u00bd inches, 516 and 566 pages (two volumes), 51 photogravures.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                          A longtime favorite novel set in seventeenth-century England. First published in 1869, this is the twentieth edition. Thirteen of the images are by the Philadelphia photographer Charles L. Mitchell, but Frith provided the vast majority. Well rendered as grain gravures, they depict various locales mentioned in the text, such as Doone Valley, Castle Rock, and Dunster Castle, and have captioned tissue guards. Francis Frith (1822-1898) was a top nineteenth-century English photographer and the first one of importance to visit Egypt. He traveled fifteen hundred miles up the Nile and illustrated a number of books and portfolios with the resulting prints. His most noteworthy pictures were mammoth-size (16 x 20 inch) albumen prints of the Pyramids and Sphinx. Settling in Reigate, England, Frith opened a photographic printing business that became the largest in all of Europe. F. Frith and Company offered prints and postcards of the United Kingdom for decades, only closing its doors in 1971. Front hinge loose, with new endpaper, spines lightly darkened, and minor wear to covers. Set of two: $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. FRITH, Francis.<\/strong> Bill Jay, Victorian Cameraman: Francis Frith\u2019s Views of Rural England, 1850-1898<\/em>, Newton Abbot, England: David & Charles, 1973. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 9 \u00be x 7 \u00bd inches, 112 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                            Includes Jay\u2019s essay on Frith\u2019s life and work. The reproductions span England\u2019s geography and lifestyle during the second half of the nineteenth century, in pictures made largely by operators for Frith\u2019s large photographic establishment: river scenes, the countryside, townscapes, the coast, and places \u201cOff the Beaten Track.\u201d Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND. FRITH, Francis<\/strong> (attribution). Sampson\u2019s Guide to the City and Cathedral of York<\/em>, York, England: John Sampson, 1889. Softcover, 7 \u00bc x 4 \u00be inches, 136 pages, one mounted albumen print.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                              As the title indicates, a guidebook to York, England, featuring engravings and a fold-out map. The albumen print on the cover (2 \u00bd x 2 inches) is not credited, but the very first page is a full-page advertisement for \u201cFrith\u2019s Photographs of York,\u201d available at two locations in the city. The image is a straightforward picture of the city\u2019s massive cathedral, with its spires reaching toward the heavens. Cover and first signature detached, with pieces of cover and spine missing. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ENGLAND. GARDNER, Edward L. <\/strong>Fairies: The Cottingley Photographs and Their Sequel<\/em>, London: Theosophical Publishing House, 1945. Hardcover (blue-cloth spine and paper over boards), 9 \u00bc x 7 \u00bc inches, 48 pages, 5 halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                This is an entertaining book of \u201cspirit photographs\u201d made in West Yorkshire, England around 1920. They were created by two young cousins, Elsie Wright and Frances Griffith, after they claimed to have found a band of fairies living in their garden. The five images show each girl with a fairy and one of the subjects taking a sun bath. The author goes to great length to try and prove the photographs were authentic and reportedly convinced even Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, the author of Sherlock Holmes. To modern eyes the fairies are obviously only little cut-out paper figures. Accompanied by two related recent New York Times<\/em> articles and an announcement for a 1998 exhibition of the photographs at a New York gallery. Previous owner\u2019s name, corners bumped, in dustjacket that is missing a few pieces. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. ENGLAND. GERNSHEIM, Helmut. <\/strong>Beautiful London<\/em>, London: Phaidon, 1950. Hardcover (yellow-stamped blue cloth), 12 x 8 \u00be inches, 124 pages, 103 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Gernsheim\u2019s straightforward images, rendered in rich gravure, of primarily the architecture of \u201cthe world\u2019s greatest city.\u201d Features subjects such as St. Paul\u2019s Cathedral, Trafalgar Square, Buckingham Palace, Ten Downing Street, Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament, and Westminster Abbey. With a foreword by James Pope-Hennessy. Very good condition, in dustjacket with minor edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ENGLAND. HABICHT, Frank. <\/strong>Young London: Permissive Paradise<\/em>, London: George G. Harrap & Co., 1969. Hardcover (silver-stamped blue cloth), 12 \u00bc x 10 inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    A great period piece, this book presents photographs made primarily on the streets and in the music clubs of London (the singer Donovan is recognizable in one shot). There is some mild nudity, and long hair and mod and vintage clothing abound. Most of the images are printed large scale and the endpapers suggest contact sheets. Heather Cremonesi\u2019s text promotes the youth revolution, while Robert Bruce pronounces it decadent. Frank Habicht (born in 1938 in Germany) was drawn to the London scene in 1962 and subsequently worked for The Guardian<\/em>, U.S. Camera<\/em>, and other periodicals. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is lightly worn and torn. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ENGLAND. HAILE, Richard N.<\/strong> Composition for Photographers: A Course of Instruction in the Art and Science of Composition as Applied to Portrait and Landscape Photography<\/em>, London: Fountain Press, 1939. Hardcover (cream cloth with paper label), 10 x 7 \u00bd inches, 80 pages, halftone illustrations. Third impression.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      These lessons were first published in the Institute of British Photographers\u2019 Record<\/em> and initially appeared in book form in 1936. Haile organized his text into five chapters, on tone, line, the frame, principles and application, and \u201cQualities of a Good Picture.\u201d\u00a0\u00a0 Accompanying the five plates by the author (including a tipped-in frontispiece) are many small diagrams and reproductions of paintings by Durer, Rembrandt, and other artists. Richard N. Haile (1895-1968) was a fellow of the Royal Photographic Society (FRPS) and served as president of the Institute of British Photographers, 1935-36. Minor rubbing to cover. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. HAWARDEN, Clementina.<\/strong> Graham Ovenden, Clementina: Lady Hawarden<\/em>, London: Academy Editions, 1974. Hardcover (gold-stamped red paper over boards), 11 \u00be x 8 \u00be inches, 112 pages, 106 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Features primarily Hawarden\u2019s indoor portraits of upper-class English women from the middle of the nineteenth century. Her Victorian subjects are well dressed and coiffed. \u201cShe is representative of those amateur photographers who adopted the poses and self-consciousness of art photography while avoiding its monumentality and didacticism.\u201d Hawarden (1822-1865), whose work was admired by Lewis Carroll, was part of an aristocratic Scottish family and one of her sons was elected to the House of Lords. Near fine condition, in lightly wrinkled and rubbed dustjacket. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. HELLEBRAND, Nancy. <\/strong> Londoners: Photographs by Nancy Hellebrand<\/em>, London: Lund Humphries, 1974. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 10 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 56 pages, 48 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Issued without a dustjacket and with an introduction by Simon Wilson. The photographs are straightforward portraits of individuals in their home environments, probably made with a 2 \u00bc-x-2 \u00bc-inch camera. Shortly before she published this book, the American photographer Nancy Hellebrand (born 1944) lived in London for a few years, where she studied with Bill Brandt. Her work is in the collection of the Museum of Modern Art, New York. Fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. HERSCHEL, John. <\/strong>Larry J. Schaaf, Tracings of Light: Sir John Herschel & the Camera Lucida<\/em>, San Francisco: Friends of Photography, 1990. Hardcover (blind-stamped black cloth), 10 x 13 \u00bd inches, 120 pages, 79 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Sir John Herschel (1792-1871) was an accomplished English scientist and promoter of the concept of photography, undertaking fundamental research and inventing photographic fixer (hypo). Before the invention of photography, he made hundreds of drawings using the camera lucida<\/em>, an instrument that allowed individuals to view a scene from nature and a sheet of paper simultaneously, as an aid in their drawing. Making realistic renderings was still a challenge and Herschel was among those who succeeded at creating convincing optically-aided drawings. Scholar Schaaf provides fresh information about Herschel, his circle, their role in early photography, and the importance of the camera lucida<\/em>. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND. HOFER, Evelyn. <\/strong>V. S. Pritchett, London Perceived<\/em>, New York: Harcourt, Brace and World, 1962. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, 116 pages, gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Features Hofer\u2019s precise photographs of people and architecture, made with a large-format camera and presented in high-quality gravure. Far exceeding the look of most \u201ctravel\u201d photographs, the pictures reveal her sensitive eye and connection with the subjects.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              German-born Evelyn Hofer (1922-2009) spent most of her life in the United States, where she emigrated in 1946. She produced fashion work for Vogue<\/em> and Vanity Fair<\/em> and made pictures for many Time-Life books. Her most lasting legacy, however, are the six location books (of which this is one) published primarily during the 1960s in a similar format. Bottom of spine bumped, light edge wear to dustjacket. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ENGLAND. IZIS. <\/strong>The Queen\u2019s People<\/em>, London: Harvill Press, 1953. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 7 \u00bc x 5 \u00bd inches, 72 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This cute little books was published the year that Queen Elizabeth was crowned. With text by John Pudney and photographs by Izis Bidermanas, it covers the coronation, its crowds, the fanfare, and the souvenirs. It includes some London night scenes (such as the one on the cover), with special decorations, fireworks, London Bridge, and other subjects. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with minimal wear. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. ENGLAND. IZIS. <\/strong>Gala Day London<\/em>, London: Harvill Press, 1953. Hardcover (gold-stamped gray cloth), 11 \u00bc x 9 inches, 148 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Here, Izis Bidermanas provides a foreigner\u2019s take on London, in pictures in which \u201cthe obvious subjects have been avoided and where there is a poetry that has nothing to do with things that receive three stars in the guide books.\u201d He presents images of ships unloading, an old man feeding a swan, a diver in the River Thames, a boy tending his rabbits, a man buying a flute, and other everyday activities. Paired with his photographs are short texts by T. S. Eliot, and other writers and artists. Preceding the plates are a few bars of music from G. F. Haendel\u2019s \u201cWater Music.\u201d Previous owner\u2019s stamp, a few bumped corners, in dustjacket that is torn, worn, and wrinkled. $125.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ENGLAND. JENNINGS, Payne.<\/strong> Photo Pictures of East Anglia<\/em>, Ashtead, Surrey, England: The Studio, c. 1900. Hardcover (gold-stamped brown cloth),\u00a08 \u00bc x 6 \u00bd inches, 136 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    With descriptive text by Annie Berlyn, straightforward photographs by Jennings of the architecture and landscape of the rural region east of London. He pictured farmers, fishermen, hikers, and such structures as cathedrals, churches, abbeys, bridges, colleges, houses, and barns. John Payne Jennings (1843-1926) photographically illustrated at least five books and made panoramic and scenic views of England that were used to promote travel and tourism in the late nineteenth century. Front hinge loose, with wear to tips. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ENGLAND. JENNINGS, Payne.<\/strong> Summer Holidays in North East England<\/em>, London: Walter Scott, c. 1900. Hardcover (gold and black-stamped green cloth), 8 \u00bd x 6 \u00be inches, 144 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Constance Cotterell provided the text to accompany Jennings\u2019 views of Northumberland, Cumberland, Westmorland, Durham, and Yorkshire. Comprises rural scenes, as well as castles, waterfalls, rocks, abbeys, bridges, viaducts, and graveyards. The cover features a hand-rendered image of the bridge and castle at Alnwick. Front hinge loose, two previous owner\u2019s names, and edgewear to cloth. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. JOHNSTON, J. Dudley. <\/strong> Pictorial Photography, 1905-1940, by J. Dudley Johnston<\/em>, London: Pictorial Group of the Royal Photographic Society, 1952. Hardcover (gold-stamped tan cloth), 10 x 7 \u00bd inches, 60 pages, 49 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This handsome little book is the only one on Johnston, a leading English pictorial photographer, who worked both before and after World War I. Fellow photographer Bertram Cox writes an appreciation of the pictures, dating from 1905 to 1940 and printed in exquisite gravure. Johnston\u2019s landscapes, cityscapes, and figure studies are all classic, soft-focus examples of pictorialism; most noteworthy are his \u201cimpressions\u201d of such cities as Liverpool, his birthplace. J. Dudley Johnston (1868-1955) served the Royal Photographic Society in many positions, most importantly as its curator of photographs for thirty years, helping to create its extraordinary permanent collection. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. JONES, Tony Armstrong. <\/strong>London<\/em>, London: Weidenfeld & Nicholson, 1958. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 11 \u00be x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Jones commences his commentary by stating that \u201cthis is a book about people\u2014London people\u2014and the way they behave. Londoners are essentially locals.\u201d He pictures them going, waiting, working, feeding, adorning, judging, reading, talking, watching, posing, dancing, performing, loving, and ending. Previous owner\u2019s name, top of spine bumped, in dustjacket that is wrinkled and torn and missing part of the back. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. KEIGHLEY, Alexander. <\/strong>Alexander Keighley<\/em>, Vienna: Die Galerie, 1936. Hardcover (printed paper and gray cloth), 12 \u00bd x 11 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 24 halftone illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This is a deluxe publication, one of three that the Austrian gallery produced on pictorial photographers (the others were Leonard Misonne and Rudolf Koppitz). It features a short foreword by Keighley and full-page quality reproductions, each of which has a tissue guard. The book was issued in an edition of one thousand, each machine-numbered (this one 158), and signed by the photographer. Keighley (1861-1947), whose name is pronounced \u201cKEETH-lee,\u201d preferred to photograph in the Middle East, to help make his images more exotic. He received an honorary fellowship from the Royal Photographic Society (Hon. FRPS). Light rubbing and small bumps to otherwise unusually clean covers. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND. KEIGHLEY, Alexander. <\/strong>Alexander Keighley, Hon. F.R.P.S: A Memorial<\/em>, London: Pictorial Group of the Royal Photographic Society, 1947. Hardcover (gold-stamped green cloth), 9 \u00be x 9 \u00be inches, 72 pages, 50 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This book, issued without a dustjacket, came out shortly after Keighley died, as a tribute to his towering stature as a pictorialist. It features two laudatory texts, one of them by fellow photographer J. Dudley Johnston. The pictures, spanning the years 1883 to 1943, are largely figure-in-landscape compositions that he heavily hand manipulated to evoke romantic fantasies. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ENGLAND. LOCK & WHITFIELD.<\/strong> Men of Mark: A Gallery of Contemporary Portraits<\/em>, London: Sampson Low, Martson, Searle, and Rivington, 1876 and 1877. Hardcover (gold-stamped black and maroon leather and cloth), 10 \u00bd x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 72 mounted woodburytypes.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This volume contains the first and second series of seven, showing English and European men who were distinguished in government, religion, science, literature, art, military, law, and medicine. Thompson Cooper provides brief biographical notes on each subject. Among the impressive array of eminent Victorians are His Royal Highness the Prince of Wales (first series frontispiece), Victor Hugo, Gustave Dore, and Jules Verne. The portraits were taken expressly for the publication and are presented as oval woodburytypes, each 4 \u00bd x 3 \u00bd inches, in a printed border. Samuel Lock and George Whitfield ran a London portrait studio from 1856 to 1894, and are most remembered for their contributions to Men of Mark<\/em>. See: George Eastman House, Imagining Paradise<\/em>. Occasional foxing, wear to cover edges and tips. $750<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. ENGLAND. MAULL & FOX.<\/strong> C. S. Ward, Hints on Driving<\/em>, London:<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  C.S. Ward, 1870. Softcover (gold-stamped red cloth over boards), 9 \u00bd x 7 \u00be inches, 24 pages, one mounted albumen print.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This is a primer on operating a horse-drawn coach, written by the \u201cWell-known Whip of the West,\u201d who explains eight rules of \u201cdriving,\u201d including, most importantly, the use of the whip. The frontispiece is a studio portrait of a well-dressed driver with mutton-chops, in a top hat, holding a whip and straps (albumen print, 3 \u00bd x 2 \u00bd inches). Henry Maull (1829-1914) and John Fox (1832-1907) partnered during the 1870s and 1880s, making portraits of noted British subjects in their London studio. Previous owner\u2019s name, first signature loose, mild foxing and browning, wear and spotting to the cover. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ENGLAND. MILLER, Lee. <\/strong> Ernestine Carter, editor, Bloody But Unbowed: Pictures of Britain Under Fire<\/em>, New York: Charles Scribner\u2019s Sons, 1941. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 9 x 7 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 109 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Documentary photographs of Britain during World War II, showing the destruction from bombing and the resilience of its people. Dedicated to prime minister Winston Churchill, with a preface by radio reporter Edward R. Murrow. Many photo agencies contributed pictures for the book, but Miller\u2019s were the only ones made exclusively for it and she is the only photographer credited on the title page. Lee Miller (1907-1977) was associated with Man Ray in Paris in the 1930s, and subsequently worked as a fashion photographer and war correspondent for Vogue<\/em>. One corner lightly bumped, in a dustjacket with a sticker stain and minimal wear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ENGLAND. MOHOLY-NAGY, L\u00e1szl\u00f3. <\/strong>Bernard Fergusson, Portrait of Eton<\/em>, London: Frederick Muller, 1949. Hardcover (black-stamped red paper over boards), 9 \u00be x 7 \u00be inches, 80 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This is an update of the 1937 book, Eton Portrait<\/em>, by the same author. In pictures and words, it describes Eton College, one of the world\u2019s leading independent schools for young men. Moholy-Nagy\u2019s straightforward photographs show the boys primarily studying and playing. Cover split at bottom of spine and bumped, stains on fore-edges, dustjacket worn, torn, and partially missing. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. NEWMAN, Arnold.<\/strong> The Great British<\/em>, Boston: New York Graphic Society, 1979. Hardcover (gold-stamped red cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 60 halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        The esteemed American portrait photographer\u2019s collection of leading English figures from politics, religion, theater, music, painting, and literature. Among the subjects are Francis Bacon, Cecil Beaton (on the cover), Bill Brandt, Sir Alec Guinness, George Harrison, David Hockney, and Henry Moore. This copy signed by Newman. Fine condition, in lightly creased dustjacket. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. POULTON, Samuel E.<\/strong> L. M. Wise, and Margaret Wrightson, Names We Love and Places We Know<\/em>, London: Hazell, Watson, and Viney, 1890. Hardcover (black and gold-stamped brown cloth), 6 \u00bc x 5 inches, 188 pages, 4 mounted albumen prints.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          The subtitle of this book is \u201cA Birthday Text-Book of Literary Gems with Local Photographs.\u201d It features, for each day of the year, a short verse by the likes of Emerson and Longfellow and blank space to fill in the names and birth year of individuals. There are entries on most pages (four dates per page), with the oldest for a man who died in 1839. The four albumen prints (4 x 3 inches each) depict the cathedral of Sherbourne, England, from \u201cPoulton\u2019s Series.\u201d The frontispiece is an elevated view from afar, the second image shows the full structure frontally, and the two remaining ones place it in the context of the surrounding domestic and commercial buildings. English photographer Samuel E. Poulton (1819-1898), also a publisher of photographic prints, was active from the 1850s to 1890s, in London and elsewhere. A copy of the book in Worldcat provided the author\u2019s names and publication date, as they do not appear in this copy. An unusual item. Hinges a little loose, occasional foxing, and covers worn. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. RAY-JONES, Tony. <\/strong>A Day Off<\/em>, Boston: New York Graphic Society, 1974. Softcover, 10 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 120 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This the first book by Ray-Jones (1941-1972), published a few years after he died at a young age, and remains his defining publication. Though English, he studied design at Yale University and freelanced in the United States. After returning to his homeland, he looked afresh upon his fellow Englishmen, photographing them in 1967 to 1969. \u201cPictured here, with a sharp but compassionate eye, are people seriously, doggedly intent on leisure activities: at the seashore, at carnivals, at horse and dog shows, at folk festivals, dances, beauty contests, and at Ascot and Eton\u2014all relaxing at a furious clip.\u201d Covers lightly browned and curled at edges. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND. REJLANDER, Oscar G.<\/strong> Charles Darwin, The Expressions of the Emotions in Man and Animals<\/em>, New York: D. Appleton, 1888. Hardcover (black and gold-stamped brown cloth), 8 x 5 inches, 376 pages, 7 collotype (heliotype) illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Written by the English scientist who developed the theory of evolution, this book was first published in London about fifteen years earlier. Rejlander\u2019s plates, each of which has multiple images ganged together, show babies crying, examples of grief, joy, sneering, defiance, fear, and shrugging of the shoulders. The photographer, recognizable by his bald head and white mutton chops, posed for some of the pictures himself. Oscar Gustav Rejlander (1813-1875) was born in Sweden and learned photography in 1853 in England, where he spent the rest of his life. He became one of the first high-art photographers during the Victorian era, known for his annual composite pictures. The most famous of these was \u201cThe Two Ways of Life\u201d (1857), a sentimental allegory showing a man choosing between a future of good or evil. Covers worn, previous owners\u2019 names, signatures loose. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ENGLAND. REJLANDER, Oscar G. <\/strong>Edgar Yoxall Jones, Father of Art Photography: O. G. Rejlander, 1813-1875<\/em>, Newton Abbot, England: David and Charles, 1973. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue paper over boards), 9 \u00be x 7 \u00bd inches, 112 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This biographical monograph appropriately opens with the frontispiece as Rejlander\u2019s notorious 1857 image, \u201cThe Two Ways of Life,\u201d shown in two versions and analyzed in great detail. Jones goes on to discuss the photographer\u2019s other, less-known work\u2014tableaux, genre, allegories, and \u201cstudies of the ideal.\u201d Among them are illustrations for Charles Darwin\u2019s 1872 book, On the Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals<\/em>, some of which Rejlander posed for himself. Rejlander (1813-1875) was one of the first Victorian photographers to self-consciously attempt to make high art with the camera. Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket with minor edgewear and creases. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. ENGLAND. ROYE. <\/strong>Nude Ego<\/em>, London: Chantry, 1958. Hardcover (blue-stamped pink cloth), 9 \u00bc x 6 \u00bc inches, 222 pages, 130 halftone illustrations (one in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This is the autobiography of the English photographer Horace Roye (1906-2002). He recounts his international travels, adventures, photographic work, and encounters with stars, models, and personalities. According to the flap, \u201cMore than a million and a half copies of his books of photographic studies have been sold\u2014a world record.\u201d His nudes are in the typical period cheesecake and glamor styles. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is chipped and missing a few pieces. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ENGLAND. SANDWITH, Francis. <\/strong>London by Night<\/em>, New York: Oxford University Press, 1935. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 10 x 7 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 100 halftone illustrations, dustjacket<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Sandwith turns his camera on the towers, theaters, monuments, caf\u00e9s, and other aspects of London\u2019s nocturnal streets. In the introduction, he indicates that he intended to reveal largely unknown scenes to the city\u2019s own inhabitants. Most of the images are people-less and the last few show day break at Berkeley Square and on the River Thames. Dustjacket (with tipped-on reproduction) is lightly worn and wrinkled. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ENGLAND. Sun Artists<\/em><\/strong>. W. Arthur Boord, editor, New York: Arno Press, 1973. Hardcover (blue-stamped silver cloth), 12 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 32 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This volume, issued without a dustjacket, reprints the complete but short run of this quarterly English magazine. Originally published in London between October 1889 and July 1891, each issue was devoted to a single naturalistic photographer, with an essay and four loose photogravure plates signed by the artist. They cover, in chronological order: James Gale, Henry Peach Robinson, J. B. B. Wellington, Lyddell Sawyer, Julia Margaret Cameron (the only deceased photographer), B. Gay Wilkinson, Mrs. F. W. H. Myers, and Frank Meadow Sutcliffe. While the two women provided mostly portraits, the men preferred landscapes and figure studies, heavily influenced by fellow countryman Peter Henry Emerson, the progenitor of naturalistic photography. Previous owner\u2019s name on front pastedown, with minor marks to cloth. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. TALBOT, William Henry Fox. <\/strong> Image<\/em>, June 1959. Softcover, 10 x 7 inches, 56 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Nearly the entire issue of this George Eastman House periodical is devoted to Talbot and The Pencil of Nature<\/em>. Includes Talbot\u2019s introduction and notes to all twenty-four plates from the original publication and an essay by museum director Beaumont Newhall. In 1839, Talbot (1800-1877) revealed his negative\/positive process of image making, which would remain the basis of most photography for the next 150 years. He initially experimented with light sensitive materials after being frustrated with his inability to draw. After developing the calotype (or talbotype), he used it extensively during the 1840s, establishing a business to print photographs in quantity and illustrating books with original prints. He issued his milestone book, The Pencil of Nature<\/em>, between 1844 and 1846, in six installments of twenty-four images, picturing such prosaic subjects as a ladder, a broom, and glassware. Near fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. TALBOT, William Henry Fox. <\/strong>The Pencil of Nature<\/em>, New York: Da Capo Press, 1969. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth), 12 \u00bd x\u00a010 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 24 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This oversize facsimile includes a new introduction by Eastman House director Beaumont Newhall. It reproduces all twenty-four of the original plates, tipped onto heavy pages with glassine slip sheets, and the full text. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is lightly rubbed and indented. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. TALBOT, William Henry Fox.<\/strong> Andr\u00e9 Jammes, William H. Fox Talbot: Inventor of the Negative-Positive Process<\/em>, New York: Macmillan, 1973. Hardcover (brown-stamped cream cloth), 11 x 9 inches, 96 pages, 69 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Jammes was the great European bookseller and collector of nineteenth-century photographs. Most of the book\u2019s images are from prints in his collection and appear in high quality gravure. Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND. TALBOT, William Henry Fox.<\/strong> H. J. P. Arnold, William Henry Fox Talbot: Pioneer of Photography and Man of Science<\/em>, London: Hutchinson Benham, 1977. Hardcover (gold-stamped cream cloth), 10 x 7 \u00bd inches, 384 pages, 107 halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This was the first full-length biography of Talbot, coming in at nearly four hundred pages. Based largely on original resources, it is a substantial scholarly and imaginative work, with over half a dozen portraits of Talbot and many full-color images. Near fine condition. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ENGLAND. TALBOT, William Henry Fox.<\/strong> Gail Buckland, Fox Talbot and the Invention of Photography<\/em>, Boston: David R. Godine, 1980. Hardcover (gold and blind-stamped black cloth), 11 x 10 \u00bc inches, 216 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Gail Buckland, former curator at the Royal Photographic Society, provides a thorough account of the beginnings of photography in England. She covers Talbot\u2019s finding of the latent image, his earliest fixed images, the events of the \u201cdiscovery\u201d year 1839, and The Pencil of Nature<\/em>, the first book illustrated with original photographs. This copy signed by author Buckland on the title page. Fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. ENGLAND. TALBOT, William Henry Fox.<\/strong> Mike Weaver, Henry Fox Talbot: Selected Texts and Bibliography<\/em>, Boston: G. K. Hall, 1993. Hardcover (gold-stamped paper), 10 x 7 \u00be inches, 190 pages, 47 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Includes an introduction by Weaver, six articles by Talbot, and additional texts. Reproduces all twenty four plates in The Pencil of Nature<\/em>, with analysis. The bibliography runs to over 600 entries. Near fine condition in dustjacket that is lightly rubbed with tiny edgewear. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ENGLAND. TALBOT, William Henry Fox.<\/strong> First Photographs: William Henry Fox Talbot and the Birth of Photography<\/em>, New York: Powerhouse Books, 2002. Hardcover, 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00bc inches, 200 pages, 120 full-color halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Features never-before-published images and selections from Talbot\u2019s research notebooks. Michael Gray (Fox Talbot Museum director) provides a comprehensive biography, Arthur Ollman (Museum of Photographic Arts director) analyzes Talbot\u2019s aesthetic and social significance, and Carol McCusker (Museum of Photographic Arts curator) discusses the Romantic Movement and women in Talbot\u2019s life. Mint condition, in shrink wrap. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ENGLAND. TALBOT, William Henry Fox.<\/strong> The Pencil of Nature.<\/em> Prospectuses for two facsimile editions, signed by publishers.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Hans P. Kraus, Jr., New York, 1989. Folder, 11 \u00be x 9 \u00bc inches, 6 panels, 1 halftone illustration. This one celebrated the 150th<\/sup> anniversary of photography. Features a reproduction of \u201cThe Open Door,\u201d tipped in, and with order form and letter laid in, the latter signed by Kraus. Published in an edition of 250 numbered copies, at $800. Fine condition.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Monmouth Calotype, Bath, England, 2003. Folder, 11 \u00be x 5 \u00bd inches, 5 loose pages, 8 halftone illustrations. This reprint features 24 gold-toned, tipped-in salt paper prints with letterpress text. Published in an edition of 50 copies at $7,250. Laid in is a letter from Michael Gray, the publisher and director of the Fox Talbot Museum, signed by him. Fine condition.\u00a0The pair: $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ENGLAND. TILNEY, F. C.<\/strong> The Year\u2019s Finest Pictorial Photographs 1925<\/em>, London: British Periodicals, 1925. Softcover, 11 x 8 \u00be inches, 72 pages, 30 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This annual comprised images that had previously appeared in the English periodical The New Photographer<\/em>, \u201creissued in response to the wishes of many readers to have them in a more convenient and permanent form.\u201d Tilney, a fellow of the Royal Photographic Society (FRPS) and a leading critic, writes about all thirty of the reproductions, addressing emotion, composition, and subject matter. This year\u2019s selection includes photographs by Clark Blickensderfer, J. Dudley Johnston, Alexander Keighley, and others. Faint foxing and a few short internal tears, with covers lightly sunned and rubbed. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ENGLAND. WRIGHT, Dare.<\/strong> Date with London<\/em>, New York: Random House, 1961. Hardcover (red and white-stamped black cloth and printed paper over boards), 12 \u00be x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Instead of dolls, a young boy and girl inhabit this book. On an enchanting tour of London, they hit the city\u2019s main sites, serving as a guide for children and adults alike. Among the places they visit are Westminster Abbey, Buckingham Palace, Windsor Castle, and the Houses of Parliament. Wet stamp on front free endpaper, tiny cover edgewear, in dustjacket that is torn, taped, and missing a few small pieces. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ENGLAND. The Year\u2019s Photography<\/em><\/strong>.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This annual was published by London\u2019s Royal Photographic Society, as an alternative to the country\u2019s Photograms of the Year<\/em>. Rather than focusing only on pictorialism, it also included natural history and record photographs. They usually contained about 150 pages, measuring 9 \u00bd x 7 \u00bd inches.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1935-1936, 1938-1939, 1939-1940<\/em>. Most of the illustrations are rich, full-page screen-gravures. Among the pictorialists contributing are Gustav Anderson, Harold Cazneaux, Christine B. Fletcher, Alexander Keighley, F. J. Mortimer, and D. J. Ruzicka, with commentary by J. Dudley Johnston. Softcovers, with rubbing and wear. Group of three: $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1940-1941, 1941-1942, 1942-1943, 1943-1944, 1944-1945, 1945-1946, 1946-1947<\/em>. The reproductions are now halftones and the commentary makes it clear that all the pictures were seen in the annual exhibition of the Royal Photographic Society. The three essays each year are on pictorial photography (by F. J. Mortimer and Bertram Cox), lantern slides, and nature photography. Pictorial images reproduced by Gustav Anderson, Cecil B. Atwater, Edward C. Crossett, Adolf Fassbender, Arthur Hammond, John R. Hogan, Alexander Keighley, Chin-San Long, P. H. Oelman, A. J. Patel, Stuyvesant Peabody, and Julian Smith. All softcovers, with rubbing and wear. Run of seven: $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1950-1951, 1951-1952<\/em>. Same format as above. While pictorialism is still the first and most prominent section, the annual now greatly expands its coverage to color, scientific, medical, nature, stereoscopic, architecture, news, industrial, and advertising photography, plus motion pictures. Pictorialists with reproductions include Boris Dobro, Jos\u00e9 Ortiz-Echag\u00fce and Francis Wu. One softcover and one hardcover (with dustjacket), covers rubbed and worn. The pair: $45<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ENGLAND.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 <\/strong>British Masters of the Albumen Print<\/em>, Rochester: George Eastman House, 1973. Softcover, 9 x 7 inches, 8 pages, 2 halftone illustrations. Checklist of an exhibition of nearly two hundred photographs, with an introduction by curator Robert A. Sobieszek. Includes work by photographers from James Anderson to George Washington Wilson. Tiny fold to cover.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 Cameron, Fenton, and Others: Victorian Photography at Colnaghi<\/em>, London: P. & D. Colnaghi, 2006. Softcover, 10 x 6 \u00bd inches, 28 pages, 35 duotone illustrations. A nicely designed and printed catalog for a two-week show at Colnaghi, during which a seminar on the subject was held. Includes an introduction by Tim Warner-Johnson, essays by Pam Roberts on topographical photographs and \u201cTalbot, Fenton, and Cameron,\u201d and biographies of the three. Fine condition.\u00a0Pair: $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. FRANCE. After Daguerre:<\/em><\/strong> Masterworks of French Photography (1848-1900) from the Biblioth\u00e8que Nationale<\/strong><\/em>, New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art, and Bertger-Levrault, Paris, 1980. Hardcover (silver and blind-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00bd inches, 192 pages, 201 duotone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed, with ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Read the subtitle and you\u2019ll understand the contents. Features two essays: \u201cEarly Photography in the Collection of the Cabinet des Estampes\u201d by Jean-Pierre Seguin, and \u201cThe Beginning of Photography as Art in France\u201d by Weston J. Naef. The catalog section comprises biographic information and pictures with descriptions by nearly one hundred photographers. Stand-out names are: Eug\u00e8ne Atget, Edouard-Denis Baldus, Adolphe Braun, J. B. Greene, Gustave Le Gray, Etienne-Jules Marey, Nadar, and F\u00e9lix Teynard. Laid into this copy are two original reviews of the show, from Time<\/em> and the Christian Science Monitor<\/em>. Additionally, this copy is signed by essayist Naef. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with tiny edgewear. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. FRANCE. ATGET, Eug\u00e9ne. <\/strong>Original photographs.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Thirty-two (32) original gelatin silver prints, 8 x 10 inch contact prints. These prints are from Atget\u2019s original negatives in the collection of the Caisse Nationale des Monuments Historiques et des Sites, Paris. The institution acquired the negatives directly from Atget in about 1920 and subsequently printed from them for reference purposes. Each print is mounted on a sheet of blue construction paper, the back of which features handwritten information about the subject of the picture; its name, address, arrondissement, and additional related information. Atget\u2019s negative numbers are visible in most of the photographs, and some of them are archivally matted. They predate Berenice Abbott\u2019s prints from the photographer\u2019s negatives, probably by a few decades. Think of these as \u201cpoor-man\u2019s Atgets.\u201d A full set of images will be sent upon request. $250 each.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. FRANCE. ATGET, Eug\u00e9ne. <\/strong>Atget: Photographie de Paris<\/em>, New York:<\/li>\n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2. Weyhe, 1930. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth), 10 \u00be x 8 \u00bd inches, 222 pages, 96 collotype illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This is the first monograph on the great Parisian street photographer, appearing just three years after his death. It was published on the occasion of a solo exhibition at the Weyhe Gallery in New York, and issued simultaneously in English, French, and German. The frontispiece is the now well-known profile portrait of Atget by Berenice Abbott and the twenty-three page preface is by novelist\/poet Pierre Mac-Orlan. The images include a good selection of interiors, storefronts, architectural details, and street vendors. Text in French. This is an ex-library copy, with the following markings: label glue residue on spine, two labels inside front cover, blindstamp in title page, and label and card pocket in rear. Light fading to spine, short split at top of spine, and tiny tip wear. $275<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. FRANCE. BRASSAI.<\/strong> John Russell, Paris<\/em>, London: B. T. Batsford, 1960. Hardcover (gold-stamped green cloth), 9 x 6 inches, 264 pages, 42 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \u201cIn this book, Paris appears as the quintessence of a civilization , both in the earlier centuries of the city\u2019s glory and as that civilization has survived and still flourishes today.\u201d Near fine condition, in dustjacket with light edgewear and a few tears. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. FRANCE. BRASSAI. <\/strong>\u201cParis la Nuit,\u201d Evergreen Review<\/em>, May-June 1962. Softcover, 8 x 5 \u00bd inches, 8 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        The lead article and cover comprise a group of night-time pictures by Brassai from the 1956 book Quiet Days in Clichy<\/em>. Includes an excerpt of text by Henry Miller, from the same publication. Previous owner\u2019s name, spine faded, one corner bent. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. FRANCE. BRASSAI. <\/strong>The Secret Paris of the 30\u2019s<\/em>, New York: Pantheon, 1976. Hardcover (silver and blind-stamped black cloth), 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          The dustjacket breathlessly claims that this is a \u201cstunning view of the forbidden Paris of the thirties, its brothels, its whores, its pimps, its opium dens\u2014the sordid yet fascinating world where high society mingles with the underworld.\u201d Indeed, the photographer shows Parisians and other dancing, drinking, playing pool and cards, and before and after sex sessions. There is even a short chapter on the outdoor public urinals. Brassai, \u201cthe photographic equivalent of Toulouse-Lautrec,\u201d provides his memories and descriptions of the subjects. Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket that has indentations on the front and wear at the top of the spine. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. FRANCE. CARTIER-BRESSON, Henri.<\/strong> The Decisive Moment<\/em>, New York: Simon and Schuster, 1952. Hardcover (paper over boards), 14 \u00bd x 10 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 126 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket, original booklet. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Cartier-Bresson\u2019s most influential book, comprising pictures from the United States, Europe, Middle East, and Asia. They are printed large and in high-quality gravure. Henri Matisse provided the cover design (seen on both the paper boards and dustjacket) specifically for the book. Laid into this copy is the lengthy New York Times<\/em> obituary for Cartier-Bresson (August 5, 2004, on original newsprint). The spine is lightly bumped, the dustjacket is torn and missing a piece on the front. $1,500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. FRANCE. CARTIER-BRESSON, Henri. <\/strong>Fran\u00e7ois Nourissier, Cartier-Bresson\u2019s France<\/em>, New York: Viking Press, 1970. Hardcover (black-stamped white cloth), 12 \u00bd x 9 \u00be inches, 288 pages, 265 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket, caption booklet.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Cartier-Bresson had never specifically studied his native land, so in 1968 and 1969 he took time off from other assignments to do just that. All of the pictures in the book were new at the time and include his first published color work. They show the photographer\u2019s fellow countrymen and women at work and play, in both the country and the city. French writer Nourissier provides extensive text. The bottom edges of the cloth are discolored, the dustjacket is lightly worn and torn at the top of the spine. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. FRANCE. CARTIER-BRESSON, Henri. <\/strong>Henri Cartier-Bresson: Pen, Brush, and Cameras<\/em>, Minneapolis Institute of Arts, 1996. Softcover, 11 \u00bd x 10 inches, unpaginated, 48 halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Exhibition catalog for a show of Cartier-Bresson\u2019s photographs, drawings, and paintings. Printed in an edition of 1,200 copies, it includes text by Evan M. Maurer (museum director), Carroll T. Hartwell (museum curator), and Michael Brenson (art historian and critic). Features reproductions of early paintings, drawings from the 1970s to1990s, and many of Cartier-Bresson\u2019s most well-known photographs. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. FRANCE. CHAMBERLAIN, Samuel. <\/strong>Soft Skies of France<\/em>, New York: Hastings House, 1953. Hardcover (black-stamped green cloth), 9 \u00bd x 7 \u00bc inches, 160 pages, screen-gravures illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  While the sky is the ostensible subject of this book, most of the pictures have substantial foregrounds that feature French landscapes and architecture. Chamberlain transversed most of the country, from Paris to Cannes to the Atlantic Ocean. The images, each with brief commentary, are presented in rich gravure and the soft tonalities of pictorialism. Samuel Chamberlain (1895-1975), a renowned etcher and member of the American National Academy, produced similar books on New England and was considered the \u201cphotographer-laureate\u201d of the region. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. FRANCE. CLERGUE, Lucien. <\/strong>N\u00e9e de la Vague<\/em>, Bellegarde, France: Editions Pierre Belfond, 1968. Hardcover (black-stamped gray paper over boards), 12 x 9 \u00be inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This is Lucien Clergue at his best: parts of women\u2019s bodies asplash in ocean waves. He commences the book with a few pages of just the water itself, violently encountering shore rocks. Then, he essays the female form, primarily the torso and breasts, but also buttocks, arms, and back. While they are usually recognizable, some images border on the abstract, somewhat akin to Bill Brandt\u2019s nudes. The book closes with images that represent the calm after the storm; shimmering quite water on the sand and shore. It is a dramatic presentation, lacking any text except for basic publishing information (apparently he felt his images were above words), richly printed in gravure (with extraordinarily dark blacks), with all of the images bleeding off at least two edges of the page. Lucien Clergue (French, born 1934) is best known for his voluptuous female nudes in water, in both black-and-white and color, but also photographed bullfights, landscapes, and Marseille, France. For many years he taught at both the New School for Social Research in New York and the University of Provence in France. He also served as a cinematographer on many short films and a feature-length one on Pablo Picasso. In 1970, he founded the Recontres Internationales de al Photographie in Arles. This copy is boldly signed by Clergue on the title page. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with a few spots and wrinkles, and missing the top \u00bc-inch of the spine. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. FRANCE. DAGUERRE, Louis Jacques Mand\u00e9. <\/strong>Helmut and Alison Gernsheim, L. J. M. Daguerre (1787-1851), the World\u2019s First Photographer<\/em>, Cleveland: World Publishing Co., 1956. Hardcover (gold and black-stamped brown cloth), 10 x 7 \u00bd inches, 216 pages, 117 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      According to the flap, this is \u201can absorbing account of the life of Louis Daguerre, the man responsible for giving us the first practical process of photography. From the beginnings of Daguerre\u2019s career in the arts as an apprentice to an architect, through his extensive work as a scene designer with the Diorama, and the successful culmination of his experiments with the daguerreotype, the Gernsheims have drawn a detailed portrait of a man whose invention has been called the greatest since that of the printing press.\u201d Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is rubbed and lightly edgeworn. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. FRANCE. DAGUERRE, Louis Jacques Mand\u00e9. <\/strong>Beaumont Newhall, Daguerre<\/em>, New York: Winter House, 1971. Hardcover (blind-stamped black cloth), 10 \u00bc x 6 \u00be inches, 282 pages, 36 halftone illustrations, slipcase.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        A short historical and descriptive account of the launching of photography in France, including Daguerre\u2019s earlier undertaking, the Diorama. The bulk of the book comprises full reprints of both the English and French language editions of Daguerre\u2019s 1839 manual on the process. Issued without a dustjacket. Top of cloth spine lightly bumped, in a lightly edgeworn slipcase. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. FRANCE. DEMACHY, Robert.<\/strong> Anna Bowman Dodd, In and Out of Three Normandy Inns<\/em>, Boston: Little, Brown, 1910. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth with mounted reproduction), 8 x 5 \u00bd inches, 398 pages, 32 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This is the revised and corrected edition (issued without a dustjacket) of the 1892 first, which did not have illustrations by Demachy. Dodd\u2019s charming travelogue through the French countryside is interspersed with 24 of Demachy\u2019s soft, evocative landscape and rural images, made especially for the book. The cover features a very painterly image by him of a stand of trees that also appeared as a photogravure in Camera Work<\/em>. The leading French pictorialist around 1900, Robert Demachy (1859-1936) was most revered for his images of female nudes. He was a cofounder of the Photo-Club de Paris, exhibited extensively in photographic salons, and championed the gum-bichromate process, which allowed hand manipulation of the image during development. Light wear to cover, front hinge a little loose, and previous owner\u2019s stamp and notation. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. FRANCE. DEMACHY, Robert.<\/strong> Anna Bowman Dodd, In and Out of Three Normandy Inns<\/em>, New York: G. P. Putnam\u2019s Sons, 1929. Hardcover (red-stamped blue cloth), 9 x 6 \u00bc inches, 356 pages, 19 halftone illustrations (1 in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This is a curious and little-known Demachy item, as it includes reproductions of drawings<\/em>, not photographs, by him. See above for the previous edition, with his photographic illustrations. After years as the top French pictorialist, Demachy gave up photography to pursue drawing at the outbreak of World War I, for unknown reasons. His crayon drawings (and pastel frontispiece) are competent renditions of specific sites in the text. Demachy receives credit on both the front of the dustjacket and title page. Mild internal foxing, in a dustjacket that is chipped, torn, and faded on the spine. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. FRANCE. DOISNEAU, Robert. <\/strong>Les Parisiens Tels Qu\u2019ils Sont<\/em>, Paris: Robert Delpire, 1954. Hardcover (black-stamped white cloth with label affixed), 7 \u00bd x 5 \u00bd inches, 124 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              The title translates as \u201cThe Parisians As They Are,\u201d and Doisneau does, in fact, look at everyday life in the French capital, both during daylight and at night. His subjects shop, kiss, eat, drink, bicycle, dance, and walk the beautiful streets of Paris. Text and commentary by Robert Giraud and Michel Ragon. Light browning to spine, in dustjacket with light edgewear and a piece missing from the front. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. FRANCE. DOISNEAU, Robert. <\/strong>Robert Doisneau\u2019s Paris<\/em>, New York: Simon & Schuster, 1956. Softcover, 11 x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 148 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                With a preface by Blaise Cendrars and an introduction by Albert Pl\u00e9cy. Douiseau\u2019s insightful and tender look at the city. With his camera he essays work, leisure, the arts, plants, animals, children, l\u2019amour, and more. Ends with six photographs from his series of people looking at a painting of a nude woman through a gallery window; a woman is startled, a policeman scowls, and a husband sneaks a peak. Light wear to spine, in original glassine. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. FRANCE. DOISNEAU, Robert. <\/strong>Maurice Chevalier, My Paris<\/em>, New York: MacMillan, 1972. Hardcover (silver-stamped blue cloth), 11 \u00bc x 9 inches, 154 pages, screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  A personal tour of the city that both the actor\/singer and photographer knew well and loved. Images printed in rich gravure and organized by these sections: Villages of Paris, Children, Girls and Lovers, Streets, and Paris by Night. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with plastic coating starting to separate. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. FRANCE. FOUCAULT, Marc. <\/strong>Jean A. Keim, La Tour Eiffel<\/em>, Paris: Editions Tel, 1950. Softcover, 12 x 8 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 54 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Probably produced for tourists, this is, nonetheless, a nice production, with an essay by Keim on the building and present significance of the Eiffel Tower. The first section of images includes historical photographs of the structure and illustrations by artists such as Rousseau, Utrillo, and Duffy and photographers Brassai and Pierre Boucher. Following is a section devoted to twenty photographs, also in rich gravure, by Marc Foucault (1902-1985). His images emphasize the muscular and modern structure of the tower and ends with a striking one of the tower\u2019s dark and ominous, far-reaching shadow. Only tiny wear to top and bottom of spine, due to (original?) glassine cover. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. FRANCE. GIBSON, Ralph. <\/strong>The Spirit of Burgundy<\/em>, New York: Aperture, 1994. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 14 \u00bc x 11 inches, 68 duotone and 86 color halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Gibson indulges his love for France with his characteristic formal black-and-white images plus luscious color ones that survey the central district of Burgundy. His subjects include local cuisine, architecture, customs, wine cultivation, landscape, and the inhabitants. This \u201cwitty portrait is sensual but never sentimental, both stark and lush, earthy and enigmatic.\u201d Accompanied by an introduction by Alain Coulange, Burgundy\u2019s Director of Cultural Affairs, and a childhood remembrance by the French novelist Colette. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. FRANCE. HAVILAND, Paul B.<\/strong> Fran\u00e7oise Heilbrun and Quentin Bajac, Paul Burtry Haviland (1880-1950), Photographe<\/em>, Paris: Mus\u00e9e d\u2019Orsay, 1996. Softcover, 8 \u00be x 6 \u00bc inches, 96 pages, 54 halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This, the only monograph on Haviland, addresses his life and work as a pictorialist. Most of the images are figure studies and nudes, many printed in a vibrant blue, as the originals were cyanotypes. Also included is his most well-known picture, Passing Steamer<\/em>, a modernist image that Alfred Stieglitz included in a 1912 issue of Camera Work<\/em>. Paul B. Haviland (1880-1950) was a wealthy Frenchman whose family owned Haviland China. He befriended Alfred Stieglitz, funded the Little Galleries of the Photo-Secession, and helped found the avant-garde journal 291<\/em>. Text in French. Fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. FRANCE. IZIS. <\/strong>Paris des R\u00eaves, <\/em>Lausanne, Switzerland: Editions Clairefontaine, 1950. Hardcover (blank boards), 11 x 8 \u00be inches, 158 pages, 75 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Izis Bidermanas presents primarily the people and street life of his \u201cParis of Dreams.\u201d He shows them at activities like walking, playing, fishing, kissing, and resting. Each full-page high-quality gravure faces a short text by a noted literary or artistic figure, in facsimile of their handwriting with signature. Among the contributors are Andr\u00e9 Breton, Jean Cocteau, Henry Miller, and Claude Roy. Light edgewear and nick to back. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. FRANCE. JAMMES, Andr\u00e9, and Eugenia Parry Janis.<\/strong> The Art of the French Calotype<\/em>, Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1983. Hardcover (black and gold-stamped cream cloth), 9 \u00bd x 10 \u00bd inches, 286 pages, duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            A pioneering and authoritative in-depth examination of French photography on paper before the wet-collodion process. It treats the calotype in relation to prints, paintings, and society in general, and establishes a French school of photography with Hippolyte Bayard as its leader. Nearly half of the book is made up of critical biographies of 150 French calotypists, among them Louis-D\u00e9sir\u00e9 Blanquart-Evrard, Henri Le Secq, Gustave Le Gray, and Charles N\u00e8gre. Smartly written by collector Jammes and scholar Janis, well-designed, and expertly printed by Meriden Gravure. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with a few scuffs and tiny edgewear. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. FRANCE. KERTESZ, Andr\u00e9. <\/strong>Day of Paris<\/em>, New York: J. J. Augustin, 1945. Hardcover (black-stamped gray cloth), 148 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This is Kert\u00e9z\u2019s personal and quiet ode to the city he called home for many years. He essays its people, caf\u00e9s, shops, parks, and streets during three parts of each day: morning, afternoon, and night. One corner bumped and tiny wear to top of spine, tape remnants to endpapers, tear and foxing to half title page, in dustjacket that is worn and rubbed. $1,500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. FRANCE. KERTESZ, Andr\u00e9. <\/strong>J\u2019Aime Paris<\/em>, New York: Grossman, 1974. Hardcover (black-stamped gray cloth), 11 x 9 \u00bc inches, 224 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This is a more extensive book on Paris than the one above, featuring photographs taken in the 1920s, 30s, and sixties. Kert\u00e9sz looks at all aspects of street life, including selling flowers and books, drinking coffee and wine, and strolling along the River Seine. The only text is the photographer\u2019s short quip, \u201cI write with light and the light of Paris helped me express what I felt and what I feel: I Love Paris.\u201d Near fine condition. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. FRANCE. KOUDELKA, Josef. <\/strong>Limestone<\/em>, Paris: Lhoist, 2001. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 9 x 12 inches, 36 halftone illustrations, box.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The result of Koudelka being commissioned by the French limestone mining company Groupe Lhoist. Working in both Europe and the United States, he presents landscapes, mines, and machinery of the industry. The book is one continuous gatefold with large-scale panoramic images, a rich and elaborate production. Introduction by board chairman Jean-Pierre Berghmans and captions by plant managers. Trilingual text in French, German, and English. Produced in a numbered edition of 2,000, this is #259. With the original cardboard box. In Parr and Badger\u2019s The Photobook: A History, Volume II<\/em>. Near fine condition. $1,500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. FRANCE. LARTIGUE, Jacque Henri. <\/strong>Boyhood Photos of J.-H. Lartigue: The Family Album of a Gilded Age<\/em>, Lausanne, Switzerland: Ami Guichard, 1966. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth with mounted reproduction), 9 \u00bc x<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    11 \u00bd inches, 128 pages, tipped-in halftone illustrations.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This thick tome simulates a photo album, with hundreds of tipped-in reproductions of snapshots made by the young French wonder Lartigue. They show his friends and family engaging in games, water sports, and antics with bicycles, cars, and other modes of early mechanical transportation. Part of a wealthy Parisian family, Lartigue also turned his camera on the well-dressed men and women of the Belle Epoque. Includes text by an uncredited author and captions by the photographer himself, as the book was published thirty years before his death. Near fine condition. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. FRANCE. LARTIGUE, Jacque Henri. <\/strong>Diary of a Century<\/em>, New York: Viking Press, 1970. Hardcover (blind and gold-stamped brown cloth), 13 \u00bc x<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      10 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket, box.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      A substantial volume with examples from seventy years of work by the boy-wonder photographer. Lartigue began documenting his life at the age of seven, with a sense of humor and great enthusiasm. Among the personalities he encountered were Colette, Pablo Picasso, and John F. Kennedy. Interspersed among Lartigue\u2019s causal pictures are excerpts from his diaries, and the book ends with an afterword by Richard Avedon, who made the book\u2019s selection of images. Minor rubbing and creases to the fragile metallic dustjacket, but much nicer than most copies due to the presence of the original, printed cardboard box. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. FRANCE. LARTIGUE, Jacque Henri. <\/strong>Les Femmes<\/em>, New York: Dutton, 1974. Hardcover (black-stamped brown cloth), 10 \u00bd x 8 inches, 128 pages, 101 screen-gravure and color halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Comprises images of women, spanning the years 1903 to 1973. Among the subjects are Lartigue\u2019s mother, grandmother, and his beautiful girlfriends Bibi and Ren\u00e9e. Includes about ten reproductions from Autochromes, the early glass-plate color process. Two corners lightly bumped, in original, plain glassine jacket that is missing a small piece. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. FRANCE. LARTIGUE, Jacque Henri. <\/strong>Les Femmes Aux Cigarettes<\/em>, New York: Viking, 1980. Hardcover (gold-stamped black leatherette), 6 \u00bd x 6 \u00bd inches, 110 pages, 96 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          According to the flap, this is a \u201cdroll and delectable selection of those daring darlings, the cabaret stars, comediennes, and chanteuses who dominated the night life and demimonde of Paris in the late 1920s,\u201d all sporting cancer sticks. Among them are the Dolly Sisters and Josephine Baker. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with tiny edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. FRANCE. LE GRAY, Gustave. <\/strong>Eugenia Parry Janis, The Photography of Gustave Le Gray<\/em>, Art Institute of Chicago and University of Chicago Press, 1987. Hardcover (gold-stamped orange cloth), 10 x 12 \u00bc inches, 184 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This is the authoritative book on Le Gray (1820-1884), one of France\u2019s most important nineteenth-century photographers. It includes an intelligent essay by scholar Janis, covering nine time periods and bodies of work by Le Gray, from 1843 in Italy, to his 1850s seascapes (for which he is most revered), and finally Italy in the 1860s to 1880s. An elegantly designed and well printed monograph. Near fine condition. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. FRANCE. LE SECQ, Henri. <\/strong>Jean Garrigue, Chartres & Prose Poems<\/em>, New York: Eakins Press, 1970. Softcover, 7 x 5 \u00bd inches, 62 pages, 7 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This little item features an expos\u00e9 on Chartres Cathedral and ten prose poems by Garrigue. Married to the piece on Chartres are a handful of rich full-page images by Le Secq, from a century earlier. They show the clock, a doorway, and sculpture from the cathedral, plus unrelated images, such as a garden and harbor. Henri Le Secq (1818-1882) was a prominent French calotype photographer who worked during the 1850s, was a founding member of the Soci\u00e9t\u00e9 H\u00e9liographique, and documented historical architecture of France. Includes pasted-in errata slip and a loose sheet indicating that the text was set on an IBM composer and the finished piece \u201cgiven to Typophiles, with pleasure, by the Eakins Press.\u201d Light edgewear.\u00a0\u00a0 $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. FRANCE. MAGRITTE, Ren\u00e9.<\/strong> Rene Magritte: Peintures et Gouaches<\/em>, Antwerp, Netherlands: Ronny Van de Velde, 1994. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 10 x 13 \u00be inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This is an elaborate production, published posthumously, but sporting the look of an artist\u2019s scrapbook. Most of the illustrations are tipped-in, along with one that is stapled in and one that is held in place by corners. They include: reproductions of snapshots of Magritte with friends; color reproductions of many of his paintings; reproductions of documents like an exhibition proposal and a hand-written letter; and advertisements for bedroom slippers (!). With an essay by David Sylvester, bilingual in Dutch and French. Near fine condition. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. FRANCE. MAGRITTE, Ren\u00e9.\u00a0<\/strong>Ren\u00e9 Magritte: Photographs<\/em>, New York: Pace\/MacGill Gallery, 1990. Softcover, 11 x<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 21 halftone illustrations. Snapshots by the painter of friends and himself, dating from the 1920s to 1940s. Some reveal Surrealistic elements, such as a woman holding a glass and a leaf. Text by Pierre Sterckx. Die-cut cover with portrait of Magritte showing through. Laid in is a card announcement of the accompanying exhibition.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Ren\u00e9 Magritte: Paintings\/Drawings\/Sculpture<\/em>, New York: Pace Gallery, 1990. Softcover, 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 30 halftone illustrations (some in color). Offers work in various media, from the 1920s to sixties. Includes a few gatefolds and commentary by Magritte himself.\u00a0\u00a0 The die-cut cover reveals a classical female figure, which in the full painting is superimposed on the back of a man in a bowler, contemplating a forest.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Two volumes housed in the original slipcase that reproduces Magritte\u2019s painted images of clouds. Books near fine, the slipcase with a few wrinkles along spine. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. FRANCE. MAN RAY. <\/strong>Kiki, The Education of a French Model: Kiki\u2019s Memoirs<\/em>, New York: Boar\u2019s Head, 1950. Hardcover (black-stamped maroon cloth), 9 \u00bc x 6 \u00bc inches, 192 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The subtitle reads: \u201cThe Loves, Cares, Cartoons and Caricatures of Alice Prin, Originally Souvenirs Kiki<\/em> in French and Kiki\u2019s Memoirs<\/em> in English.\u201d Introduction by Ernest Hemingway. Originally published twenty years earlier and banned in the United States, these are the tales of a young woman modeling and living among the avant-garde artists of Paris. The illustrations include artwork by and of Kiki; most of the photographic reproductions are uncredited, except for six portraits of her by Man Ray. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. FRANCE. MARVILLE, Charles. <\/strong>Louis Cheronnet, Paris tel Qu\u2019il Fut<\/em>, Paris: Editions Tel, 1951. Softcover, 11 \u00bd x 8 \u00be inches, 100 pages, 104 photogravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Cheronnet discusses Paris \u201cas it was\u201d during the mid-nineteenth century and provides detailed notes on about 25 of the pictures. Marville pictures such scenes as windmills in Monmartre, Avenue de l\u2019Opera, the Palais-Royal, Le Chateau des Tuileries, Le Pont-Neuf, and Notre-Dame. Many of the images, printed in rich brown gravure, show narrow Parisian streets, as precedents to the work of Eugene Atget. Painter-printmaker Charles Marville (1816-1879) commenced photography in the 1850s. He is most revered for his methodical survey during the 1860s of Paris\u2019 meandering medieval passages and ancient structures soon to be destroyed by Baron Hussmann\u2019s redesign of the city, with new wide boulevards. Text in French. Previous owner\u2019s inscription, light wear to top of spine, two tears to dustjacket along spine, covers browned, but still attractive, in added glassine jacket. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. FRANCE. NADAR.<\/strong> Nigel Gosling, Nadar<\/em>, New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1976. Hardcover (blind and gold-stamped black cloth), 12 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, 298 pages, 359 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This was the first full-scale book on the great French portrait photographer. It constitutes a visual record of the central personalities of nineteenth-century French culture, such as Charles Baudelaire (a close friend), George Sand, Victor Hugo, Sarah Bernhard, and Honor\u00e9 Daumier. Born Gaspard-F\u00e9lix Tournachon, Nadar (1820-1910) was preceded in photography by a brother and succeeded by a son, who ran the studio into the twentieth century. He made the world\u2019s first aerial photograph in 1868, from a balloon over his native Paris. Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket that is lightly wrinkled. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. FRANCE. NEGRE, Charles.<\/strong> Andr\u00e9 Jammes, Charles N\u00e8gre Photographe, 1820-1880<\/em>, Paris: Andr\u00e9 Jammes, 1963. Softcover (printed paper with mounted repro-duction), 13 x 16 \u00bd inches, 42 pages, 31 collotype (?) illustrations, original acetate dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This is an early monograph on a photographer, unusually large-scale, and elaborately produced. All of the high-quality reproductions are tipped in and one (of an architectural detail) is a fold-out that measures a whopping 28 x 13 inches. Other images show landscapes, monuments, and example of N\u00e8gre\u2019s important series of Parisian street vendors, mostly from the 1850s and printed from paper negatives. After studying painting with Ingres and Delaroche, Charles N\u00e8gre (1820-1880) became a prominent French photographer during the middle of the nineteenth century. He studied and experimented with photogravure and was known for producing particularly large salt prints, measuring up to 20 x 30 inches. Written by one of the earliest collectors of photographs, with all text in French, in an edition of only 300 copies. Light foxing and minor wrinkles to covers. $1,000<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. FRANCE. NORI, Claude. <\/strong>French Photography: From its Origins to the Present<\/em>, New York: Pantheon, 1979. Hardcover (gold-stamped orange cloth and paper over boards), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, 170 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This is a serviceable history of French photography, from slightly before Daguerre to the then contemporary work of the 1970s. It cover inventors such as Ni\u00e9pce, pioneers like Nadar, pictorialists such as Demachy, documentarians like Atget, modernists such as Man Ray, photojournalists like Cartier-Bresson, and fashion photographers such as Jean-Loup Sieff. Features short essays on themes and biographies of selection individuals. Tiny chipping to dustjacket. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. FRANCE. PARIS.<\/strong><\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 <\/strong>Jean Roman, Paris Fin de Si\u00e8cle<\/em>, New York: Arts, Inc., 1960. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 7 \u00bd x 8 \u00bd inches, 108 pages, screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket. This is an attractive little volume on life in gay Paris <\/em>at the turn of the twentieth century. Includes high-quality gravure reproductions of photographs by Eug\u00e8ne Atget, Jacques Henri Lartigue, Edward Steichen, Alfred Stieglitz, and others. Among the leading painters represented by color images are Degas, Manet, Seurat, and Toulouse-Lautrec. Light bumps to cover, in price-clipped dustjacket with tiny edgewear and faded spine.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Armand Lanoux, Paris in the Twenties<\/em>, New York, Arts, Inc. 1960. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 7 \u00bd x 8 \u00bd inches, 108 pages, screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket. This companion volume essays the jazz age of the roaring 1920s in France\u2019s capital. \u201cSandwiched between two wars, the Parisians of the \u2019twenties defied destruction and annihilation, not only by indulging in every pleasure and luxury, but by bringing about significant revolutions in literature, art, politics, and all other fields.\u201d Features rich gravure images by the likes of Lartigue and Man Ray, and color ones by L\u00e9ger, Miro, Picasso, and more. Light cover edgewear, in price-clipped dustjacket with minor wear and a few tears.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Both edited and designed by Robert Delpire, who two years earlier issued Robert Frank\u2019s Les Americains<\/em> in a similar format. Pair: $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. FRANCE. REGNAULT, Victor.<\/strong> Laurie Dahlberg, Victor Regnault and the Advance of Photography: The Art of Avoiding Errors<\/em>, Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 2005. Hardcover (gold-stamped brown cloth), 10 x 11 \u00bc inches, 208 pages, 100 duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This is the most compete account to date of the French photographer and scientist. It examines his life and landscapes, portraits, and still lifes. Regnault (1810-1878) was a towering figure during the earliest decades of photography, making hundreds of calotype prints from paper negatives. He was the first leader of the Soci\u00e9t\u00e9 Fran\u00e7aise de Photographie and also became director of the S\u00e8vres porcelain works. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with tiny edgewear and wrinkles. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. FRANCE. SILVY, Camille. <\/strong>Mark Haworth-Booth, Camille Silvy: \u201cRiver Scene, France,\u201d<\/em> Malibu, California: J. Paul Getty Museum, 1992. Softcover, 9 \u00bc x 7 \u00bd inches, 120 pages, 3 color halftone and 47 duotone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This book is centered on a single photograph by Silvy, a quiet 1858 river scene for which he is most remembered. It was of international importance: it was made in France, first exhibited in Scotland, and first sold to an English collector. Haworth-Booth covers the photographer\u2019s life and the influence and variations of the image, in this model of photographic scholarship. Camille Silvy (1834-1910) established himself as a landscape and portrait photographer in Paris, and moved to London in 1859, where he became known for his cartes-de-visit of the Royal Family and other famous figures. In 1868 he returned to France and apparently never photographed again, being consumed by mental and physical illnesses. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. FRANCE. STRAND, Paul. <\/strong> Claude Roy, La France de Profil<\/em>, Lausanne, Switzerland: \u00c9ditions Clairefontaine, 1952. Softcover, 11 x 8 \u00be inches, 128 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This is French poet Claude Roy\u2019s and Strand\u2019s sensitive evocation of small-town and rural life in France at the middle of the twentieth century. It features photographs of people, architecture, and the landscape, richly rendered in gravure. Roy\u2019s text sometimes reproduces his handwriting and becomes a playful graphic design element. Text in French. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. FRANCE. VAN DER ELSKEN, Ed. <\/strong>Love on the Left Bank<\/em>, London: Andr\u00e9 Deutsch, 1956. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 10 \u00be x 7 \u00be inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Dutch photographer Elsken\u2019s gritty story of a young bi-racial couple living it up and down in the beat culture of Paris. \u201cThey dine on half a loaf, smoke hashish, sleep in parked cars or on benches under the trees, sometimes borrowing a hotel room from a luckier friend to shelter their love.\u201d In Roth\u2019s Book of 101 Books<\/em>. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is torn, rubbed, and missing small pieces. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. FRANCE. VAN DER ELSKEN, Ed. <\/strong>Love on the Left Bank<\/em>, Tokyo: Syoseki, 1998. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 10 \u00be x 7 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket and two bellybands.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        The much later Japanese edition. One bellyband is the publisher\u2019s and the other is from the Yaesu Book Center, where the book was purchased in Tokyo. Fine condition. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. GERMANY. Album von L\u00fcbek<\/em><\/strong>, Berlin: Globus Verlag, c. 1900. Hardcover (paper over boards with tipped-on reproduction), 10 \u00be x 13 \u00bd inches, 32 pages, 30 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          A tourist picture-book with straightforward images of the northern German city of L\u00fcbek, known for its brick Gothic architecture dating to the 1300s. Among the subjects are its city gate, churches, hospitals, museums, bridges, and statutes. The publication\u2019s most attractive feature is its Art-Nouveau cover, with sinuous gold and green lines surrounding an affixed halftone. Signature of pages loose, covers with minor edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. GERMANY. BLOSSFELDT, Karl. <\/strong>Urformen der Kunst: Photographische Pflanzenbilder<\/em>, Berlin: Verlag Ernst Wasmuth, 1929 (second edition). Hardcover (gold-stamped turquoise cloth), 12 \u00bd x 10 inches, 260 pages, 120 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Art Forms in Nature<\/em> was Blossfeldt\u2019s great contribution to Germany\u2019s New Objectivity. His close-up image of plants, sometimes presented in pairs and triptychs, make them look muscular and almost machine-made. Like the first edition, the plates, in rich gravure, are backed by blank pages. Introduction by Karl Nierendorf. Text in German. Covers worn and missing a small piece at bottom of spine. $750<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. GERMANY. BOURKE-WHITE, Margaret.<\/strong> \u201cDear Fatherland, Rest Quietly:\u201d A Report on the Collapse of Hitler\u2019s \u201cThousand Years,\u201d<\/em> New York: Simon and Schuster, 1946. Hardcover (brown-stamped gray cloth), 8 \u00bd x 6 inches, 180 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Bourke-White\u2019s insider text and pictures of Germany at the end of World War II. She photographed individuals, concentration camps, bombed-out cities, children, and other remnants\u2014human and physical\u2014of Hitler\u2019s horror. Previous owner\u2019s name and date written in, dustjacket wrinkled and chipped. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. GERMANY. COKE, Van Deren. <\/strong>Avant-Garde Photography in Germany, 1919-1939<\/em>, San Francisco Museum of Modern Art, 1980. Softcover, 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, 104 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                An important exhibition catalog that rediscovered leading German modernist photographers working between the World Wars. Features about fifty individuals, such as Karl Blossfeldt, Florence Henri, Helmar Lerski, Moholy-Nagy, and Umbo. Covers rubbed. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. GERMANY. COKE, Van Deren. <\/strong>Avant-Garde Photography in Germany, 1919-1939<\/em>, New York: Pantheon, 1982. Softcover, 10 \u00be x 9 inches, 168 pages, 120 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This is an expanded version of the above publication, with more reproductions, most of them full page. Tiny corner bends. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. GERMANY. FREED, Leonard. <\/strong>Made in Germany<\/em>, New York: Grossman, 1970. Softcover, 10 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 124 screen-gravure illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    An expos\u00e9 on the daily life of the German people (East and West), printed in rich gravure. In true Magnum fashion, Freed exerted complete control over the book, making all the photographs, writing the introduction and captions (often of paragraph length), and laying it out. This copy signed and dated 1996 by Freed, on the title page. Tiny loss to front free-end paper, light edgewear and rubbing to covers. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. GERMANY. HEARTFIELD, John. <\/strong>Braunbuch \u00fcber Reichstagsbrand und Hilter-Terror<\/em>, Basel, Germany: Universum-Bucherei, 1933. Hardcover (brown-stamped brown cloth), 9 \u00bd x 6 \u00bd inches, 384 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Heartfield designed the book and provided photomontages for the front and back of the dustjacket. Both dating from 1933, they are disturbing anti-Nazi images, printed in black and red. Text in German. John Heartfield (German, 1891-1968) was a pioneer in using art as a political weapon and most known for his anti-fascist photomontages during the 1930s. One corner bumped, in the rare dustjacket that is missing some small pieces. $300<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. GERMANY. HEARTFIELD, John. <\/strong>Wieland Herzfelde, John Heartfield: Leben und Werk<\/em>, Dresden, Germany: Verlag der Kunst, 1962. Hardcover (black-stamped cream cloth), 10 \u00be x 7 \u00bd inches, 356 pages, halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This is an extensive account of Heartfield\u2019s life and work, published about five years before he died. It is heavily illustrated with his important 1930s photomontages. Text in German. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that has a small tear and light edgewear. $300<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. GERMANY. KESTING, Edmund. <\/strong>Ein Maler Sieht Durch\u2019s Objektiv<\/em>, Halle: Fotokino Verlag, 1958. Hardcover (blue-stamped blue cloth), 11 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 95 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Here Kesting presents his aesthetic theories, accompanied by a number of hand-rendered illustrations. The photographic reproductions include many portraits, which are usually a combination of a straightforward headshot and the face in silhouette. Also featured is more experimental work, of figures, skeletons, buildings, and landscapes, that are rendered as photograms, solarizations, or by other darkroom techniques. Edmund Kesting (1892-1970) was a photographer, painter, and art professor. He associated with other avant-garde artists and some of his work was considered degenerate by the Nazis. He worked in Berlin, Dresden, and after 1956 in Potsdam. Text in German. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is torn, worn, and missing small pieces. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. GERMANY. KUHN, Fritz. <\/strong>Sehen und Gestalten: Natur und Menschenwerk<\/em>, Leipzig, Germany: Verlag E. A. Seemann, 1951. Hardcover (gold-stamped green cloth and paper over boards), 12 x 8 \u00be inches, 156 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Second edition.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            With a ten-page introduction by K\u00fchn, this is largely a picture book, in the tradition of fellow Germans Karl Blossfeldt and Albert Renger-Patzsch; the title translates as Vision and Form: Nature and the Manmade.<\/em> It comprises many images from nature, printed in high-quality gravure, but also pairings of natural subjects and manmade objects. Among the later are a spider web and a church ceiling and a pine cone and a building spire. The majority of the pictures are by K\u00fchn, but Blossfeldt, Renger-Patzsch, Alfred Ehrhardt, and other German modern photographers also contributed. The first edition also appeared in 1951, and the book was reprinted as late as 1970, in its eighth edition. Fritz K\u00fchn (1910-1967) was a German photographer and goldsmith who apparently spent his entire life in Berlin. Dustjacket has light edge wear, tears, and chips. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. GERMANY. RENGER-PATZSCH, Albert. <\/strong> Die Welt ist Sch\u00f6n<\/em>, Munich: Kurt Wolff Verlag, 1928. Hardcover (silver-stamped blue flexible cloth), 11 \u00bd x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 100 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              The World is Beautiful<\/em> was Renger-Patzsch\u2019s major contribution to the New Objectivity movement. It features his emotionally detached photographs of plants, animals, people, the landscape, industrial products, architecture, and machinery. Includes an introduction by Carl Georg Heise. Scattered light foxing, minor edge wear, and a slightly sunned spine, lacking the dustjacket. $300<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. GERMANY. SANDER, August. <\/strong>August Sander: Menschen Ohne Maske<\/em>, Luzern and Frankfurt: Verlag C.J. Bucher, 1971. Hardcover (black paper over boards), 12 x 9 inches, 314 pages, 234 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                An extensive selection of Sander\u2019s portraits of German types such as farmers, politicians, musicians, and artists. Introduction by Golo Mann and biographical text by the photographer\u2019s son, Gunther. Text in German. Tiny edgewear, in dustjacket that is torn and worn. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. GERMANY. SANDER, August. <\/strong>Rheinlandschaften: Photographien, 1929-1946<\/em>, Munich, Germany: Schirmer, Mosel, 1975. Hardcover (white paper over boards), 12 \u00be x 10 \u00be inches, 140 pages, 40 duotone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This oversize book features Sander\u2019s German landscapes. Among the subjects are Westerwald, L\u00f6wenburg, and the Rhine River. The quality plates end with a set of views of Wolkenburg, made in all four seasons. German text by Wolfgang Kemp. Near fine, in dustjacket that is lightly sunned. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. GERMANY. SANDER, August. <\/strong>August Sander: Menschen des 20. Jahrhunderts: Portraitphotographien, 1892-1952<\/em>, Munich, Germany: Schirmer, 1980. Hardcover (silver-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00bc inches, 560 pages, 431 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket, slipcase. Inscribed by the photographer\u2019s grandson.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This thick volume is one of the most comprehensive collections of Sander\u2019s German portrait work, with over four hundred high quality gravure reproductions. They are grouped in the following sections: archetypes, farmers, rural characters, small-town folk, athletes, workers, craftsmen, manufacturers, technicians, mothers and children, families, society ladies, students, scholars, officials, doctors, lawyers, judges, soldiers, aristocrats, clergymen, teachers, businessmen, politicians, artists, writers, actors, architects, painters and sculptors, composers, musicians, circus performers, itinerants, servants, traveling salesmen, handicapped children, and, lastly, Jewish victims of Nazi persecution. Major text, in German, by Ulrich Keller. This copy with a full-page, playful inscription from Gerd Sander, August\u2019s grandson, dated in the year of publication. Near fine condition. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. GERMANY. SANDER, August. <\/strong>August Sander: Photographs of the German Landscape<\/em>, Washington, D.C.: Phillips Collection, 2004. Softcover, 9 x 8 inches, 82 pages, 40 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Exhibition catalog of images Sander made in Rhineland-Palantinate, a region in western Germany in the 1930s. Includes an introduction by curator Stephen Bennett Phillips and two essays: \u201cA Collector\u2019s Perspective on August Sander\u2019s Landscape Photographs\u201d by Kent and Marcia Minichiello and \u201cAugust Sander: Physiognomy of Landscape\u201d by Susanne Lange and Gabriele Conrath-Scholl. Near fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. GERMANY. TILLMAN, Ulrich, and Wolfgang Vollmer.<\/strong> Meisterwerke der Fotokunst<\/em>, Colgne, Germany: Weinend Verlag, 1985. Hardcover (gold-stamped red cloth with mounted reproduction), 8 \u00bd x 5 \u00be inches, 104 pages, halftone illustrations (a few in color), slipcase. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This is a sendup on collecting fine-art photographs, in which Tillman and Vollmer allegedly find unknown predecessors to iconic images. Among those spoofed are Edward Weston\u2019s \u201cPepper No. 30,\u201d Ansel Adams\u2019 \u201cMoonrise over Hernandez,\u201d and images by Cameron, Frith, Sander, Outerbridge, Kertesz, Man Ray, Penn, Warhol, Mapplethorpe, and others. Includes text by the \u201ccollectors,\u201d Friedrich Heubach, and L. Fritz Gruber, who writes on \u201cOutranked Masterpieces\u201d. Glassine envelope pasted in with a silver of wood, described as an \u201coriginal fragment of Klaus Peter Schnuettger-Webs\u2019 plate camera, which he threw out of the studio window at the Bauhaus in Dessau following an argument with Herbert Bayer in 1925.\u201d The numbered edition of 1,000 is signed by the two authors. Fabulously funny for those who know the history of photography. Bilingual text in German and English. Near fine condition, except for two scuffs to back of slipcase. $750<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. HOLLAND. OORTHUYS, Cas. <\/strong>The Netherlands: Seen by the Tourist<\/em>, Amsterdam: Contact and Royal Dutch Touring Club, 1947. Hardcover (gold-stamped black cloth and paper over boards), 10 x 7 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Produced for the tourist but photographed by a professional native. Cas Oorthuys (1908-1975) is perhaps the best-known Dutch photographer working at the middle of the twentieth century. Exposed to the avant-garde art movements of de Stijl and the Bauhaus, he began photographing for news magazines in the 1930s. He was active in socialist and anti-fascist political groups and joined the Dutch resistance during the German occupation of his country during World War II. This book, with an introduction by Johan Luger, presents the people, built environment, and landscape of the Netherlands. Printed in quality gravure, the images are divided into three sections: Lowlands, Upgrounds, and Towns of Holland. Bilingual text in Dutch and English. Light browning to covers, in dustjacket with a few tears and edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. HOLLAND. TROMP, Theodoor Philibert.<\/strong> Revival of the Netherlands<\/em>, Amsterdam: Contact, 1946. Hardcover (gold-stamped black cloth and paper over boards), 11 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 140 pages, screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Text and images covering the Nazi destruction of Holland during World War II and the beginning of reconstruction afterwards. The photographs show dead bodies, bombed-out buildings, soup lines, and the resistance. Given the publication date of 1946, rebuilding had only recently started, on dikes, bridges, and housing. Bilingual essay and captions in Dutch and English. Most of the individual photographs are credited, with many of them by Cas Oorthuys (see above). Laid into this copy is the original sales receipt, dated 1948. Endpapers browned, lacking a dustjacket. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. HOLLAND. VAN DER ELSKEN, Ed. <\/strong>Amsterdam! Oude Foto\u2019s, 1947-1970<\/em>, Amsterdam: Van Holkema & Warendorf, 1979. Softcover, 12 x 11 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Comprises Dutch photographer Van Der Elsken\u2019s gritty look at Amsterdam over two decades. He focuses on its people and activities such as street demonstrations, and produces a book similar to the city tomes of William Klein. Text in Dutch. Previous owner\u2019s inscription, covers lightly browned, edgeworn, and bent. $75.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. HONG KONG. MELE, Pietro Francesco. <\/strong>Hong-Kong<\/em>, Florence, Italy: Edizioni la Nuova Italia, 1964. Hardcover (blank boards), 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Mele provides both the photographs and a short text on what he terms the \u201cManhattan of the Far East, which in Chinese is called \u2018sweet-scented bay\u2019.\u201d The richly reproduced gravure images present the island\u2019s culture, commerce, street life, architecture, and landscape. A little wear to tips and top and bottom of spine. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. HUNGARY. BALOGH, Rudolf. <\/strong>Ungarnfibel: Eine Bilderreihe aus dem Leben und Schaffen des Ungarischen Volkes<\/em>, Budapest: K\u00f6niglich Ungarischen Handelsamtes, 1938. Hardcover (red and gray-stamped brown cloth), 10 \u00bd x<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 100 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  With a short text by Ladislaus von Szab\u00f3, this is an attractive look at the people, customs, and animals of Hungary. The rich gravure images present individuals and groups farming, worshiping, baking, eating, weaving, dancing, and undertaking various other activities, often outfitted in fancy traditional costume. Among the animals included are horses, cows, pigs, sheep, chickens, ducks, turkeys, and deer. Balogh (1879-1944), a leading Hungarian photographer, worked in the artistic ethnographic style of the Spaniard Jos\u00e9 Ortiz-Echag\u00fce. Text in German. Light stain to one corner of pages throughout and faint soiling to covers. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. HUNGARY. A F\u00e9nyk\u00e9p Var\u00e1zsa: Tizenk\u00e9t Ki\u00e1ll\u00edt\u00e1s a Magyar Fotogr\u00e1fia, 150 \u00c9ves T\u00f6rt\u00e9net\u00e9b\u00f6l <\/em><\/strong> [The Magic of Photography: 12 Exhibitions on 150 Years of Hungarian Photography]<\/em>, Budapest: Association of Hungarian Photographers and Szabad T\u00e9r Publishing Co., 1989. Softcover, 11 \u00bc x 7 \u00be inches, 416 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    A major catalog published on the occasion of Budapest\u2019s celebration of the sesquicentennial of photography in 1989. Although there were a dozen exhibitions, at different galleries and museums, the publication includes fifteen essays, covering Hungarian photography from the beginning to the present. Among the subjects are daguerreotypes, albums, and the Hungarian style. Major photographers such as the ethnographer Rudolf Balogh and the modernist J\u00f3zsef P\u00e9csi receive individual treatment. This is an important reference book, with all text bilingual, in both Hungarian and English. Near fine condition. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. HUNGARY. GREENBERG Gallery.<\/strong><\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Two volumes, published in 1995 by the Howard Greenberg Gallery and its ancillary gallery \u201c292.\u201d They accompanied simultaneously shows, one of modernist photographs (1916-1940) and the other of vintage collages from the 1930s.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      The Hungarian Circle<\/em>, New York: Howard Greenberg Gallery, 1995. Softcover, 11 x<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      8 \u00bd inches, 16 pages, 13 halftone illustrations. Includes essays by photographer\/curator Michael Simon and K\u00e1roly Kincses, director of the Hungarian Museum of Photography. While the show included work by big-name Hungarian-born photographers such as Brassa\u00ef and Andr\u00e9 Kert\u00e9sz, all the illustrations are devoted to lesser knowns like P\u00e1l Funk Angelo and J\u00f3zsef P\u00e9csi. Laid into this copy is a notice for the exhibition. Fine condition.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      [The Hungarian Circle]<\/em>, New York: 292, 1995. Softcover (hand bound with cord ties), 9 \u00bd x 7 inches, 32 pages, 30 halftone illustrations. This volume reproduces collages made by an unknown Hungarian artist in the 1930s, apparently from newspaper and magazine clippings. Printed in full color, these modernist collages juxtapose such imagery as Adolf Hitler and a snake\u2019s open jaws, and female nudes with a steel grid structure. Printed in an edition of 850 copies. Laid into this copy is a notice for the exhibition. Fine condition.\u00a0The set of two: $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. HUNGARY. Here We Are: Contemporary Hungarian Photographers\/<\/em><\/strong><\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        First Album<\/em><\/strong>, Budapest: Association of Hungarian Photoartists, 1991. Softcover, 64 pages, halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Comprises the work and words of 32 living Hungarian photographers, from Andr\u00e1s Balla to Lajos Weber. Contains the normal range of portraits, figure studies, still lifes, landscapes, and street scenes. Ends with an article about a newly opened museum of photography. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. HUNGARY. VISKI, K\u00e1roly<\/strong>, Hungarian Peasant Customs<\/em>, Budapest: George Vajna, 1932. Softcover, 8 x 6 \u00bd inches, 194 pages, 32 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This is an ethnographic study of Hungary\u2019s customs and costumes. Dr. Viski covers baptisms, carnivals, Easter, the May tree, the feast of wheat, weddings, St. Lucia\u2019s Day, the plays of Bethlehem, funerals, and other personal and national events. The credited photographs are similar to the work of Spanish photographer Jos\u00e9 Ortiz-Echag\u00fce, with ten of them by Rudolf Balogh (1879-1944), one of the Hungary\u2019s leading photographers in the early twentieth century. Ex-library copy, with markings, and worn covers and dustjacket.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. INDIA. BOURKE-WHITE, Margaret.<\/strong> Interview with India<\/em>, London: Phoenix House, 1950. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 8 \u00be x 5 \u00be inches, 192 pages, 64 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Accompanying her text are recently made photographs of India\u2019s princesses, child laborers, impoverished factory workers, farmers, priests, revolutionaries, and Mahatma Gandhi, both alive and at his funeral pyre. Dustjacket spine sunned, with small tears and wear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. INDIA. BOURNE, Samuel. <\/strong>Arthur Ollman, Samuel Bourne: Images of India<\/em>, Carmel, California: Friends of Photography, 1983. Softcover, 11 x 9 \u00bc inches, 48 pages, 25 duotone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Issued as the Friends\u2019 Untitled<\/em> number 33, this publication examines Bourne\u2019s work in India from 1865 to 1869. He photographed impressive buildings and the majestic landscape in Delhi, Benaras, Kashmir, and elsewhere. Ollman covers the photographer\u2019s life, travels, and working method. British photographer Samuel Bourne (1834-1912) was most recognized for this body of works. He sailed to Calcutta in 1863 and by three years later was part of the successful team Bourne and Shepherd, which still exists today. After producing hundreds of photographs with the wet-plate collodion process, he returned in 1871 to England, where he switched his business interests to cotton. Near fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. INDIA. EPSTEIN, Mitch. <\/strong>In Pursuit of India<\/em>, New York: Aperture, 1987. Hardcover (copper-stamped gray cloth), 10 x 1 \u00bc inches, 72 pages, 52 color halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This book \u201creveals a search for an elusive country where sacred ritual and the mundane coexist. It is a world filled with spectacular color, blazing skies, and the intensity of the holy festival, contrasted with the harmony and subdued tones of everyday street life. Epstein\u2019s eye for color is matched by his ability to transform day-to-day qualities of Indian life into a pattern of refined gestures and elegance, where pilgrims move down to the holy water and the truck driver bathes as if anointing himself. Out of the ordinary, Mitch Epstein reveals the detail of a timeless country in transition.\u201d Introduction by Anita Desai. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. INDIA. MARK, Mary Ellen.<\/strong> Falkland Road<\/em>, London: Thames and Hudson, 1981. Hardcover (copper-stamped blue cloth), 11 \u00bc x 10 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, color halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Mark\u2019s moving look inside the brothels of the internationally famous street in Bombay, India. She obviously gained her subjects\u2019 trust and pictures them dressing, soliciting, working, washing, and with both their children and clients. This copy signed by Mark. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with light wear and a few tears. $175<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. INDIA. MARK, Mary Ellen.<\/strong> Falkland Road<\/em>, New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1981. Softcover, 11 x 10 inches, unpaginated, color halftone illustrations. Signed, with ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This is the first American edition of the above, in soft. Laid in is a 1981 announcement of the book and show of work from it at the Castelli Gallery. Additionally, this copy is signed and dated 2000 by Mark. Light chipping to covers. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. INDIA. MARK, Mary Ellen.<\/strong> Photographs of Mother Teresa\u2019s Missions of Charity in Calcutta, India<\/em>, Carmel, California: Friends of Photography, 1985. Softcover, 10 \u00bc x 8 \u00bc inches, 48 pages, 36 duotone illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This is issue number 39 of the Friends of Photography\u2019s periodical Untitled<\/em>, with an essay by David Featherstone. It is made up of Mark\u2019s compassionate pictures of individuals that Mother Teresa and her fellow sisters nursed\u2014lepers, the blind, poor, dying, and \u201cretarted.\u201d This copy signed by Mark. Near fine condition. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. IRAN. PERESS, Gilles. <\/strong>Telex Persan<\/em>, Paris: Contrejour, 1984. Softcover, 15 x 10 \u00bd inches, 102 pages, screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Comprises photographs that French photographer Peress made in1979, during Iran\u2019s turbulent Islamic Revolution, when American hostages were snatched from the country\u2019s embassy. Countering the routine photojournalistic conceit of presenting an objective view of his subject, he instead pursued a highly personal approach. Many of his resulting images are fragmented and disorienting, like the one on the cover of the book that is presented as a bleed image across front, spine, and back. Inside, telex communications between Peress and his agency are interspersed among the images. Texts by Claude Nori and Gholam-Hossein Sa\u2019dei, in French. This is one of the most important photography books from the late twentieth century and is included in Parr and Badger\u2019s The Photobook: A History<\/em>. Miniscule edgewear. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. IRAN. PERESS, Gilles. <\/strong>Telex Iran: In The Name of Revolution<\/em>, New York: Aperture, 1983. Softcover, 15 x 10 \u00bd inches, 102 pages, screen-gravure illustrations. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Despite the 1983 date, the American edition was issued simultaneously with the French, which is the true first, as this edition states that it was \u201coriginated and produced by Contrejour.\u201d This edition included in Roth\u2019s Book of 101 Books<\/em>. Laid in are Peress\u2019 business card (with tape) and a 1991 issue of the members\u2019 magazine of the Minneapolis Institute of Arts that features a cover story on an exhibition of work from the project. Both editions are notoriously fragile, due to their size and being issued only in soft. The cover has edgewear and is separated from the body of signatures. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. IRELAND. FREEDMAN, Jill.<\/strong> A Time That Was: Irish Moments<\/em>, New York: Friendly Press, 1987. Hardcover (blind-stamped white cloth), 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Freedman\u2019s loving assessment of Ireland\u2019s landscape, people, traditions, lifestyle, music, and (of course) pubs. Introduction and captions written by the photographer. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. IRELAND. HOFER, Evelyn. <\/strong>V. S. Pritchett, Dublin: A Portrait<\/em>, New York, Harper and Row, 1967. Hardcover (gold-stamped green cloth), 11 \u00bc x\u00a08 \u00be inches, 100 pages, gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Features Hofer\u2019s precise photographs of people and architecture, made with a large-format camera and presented in high-quality gravure. Far exceeding the look of most \u201ctravel\u201d photographs, the pictures reveal her sensitive eye and connection with the subjects.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              German-born Evelyn Hofer (1922-2009) spent most of her life in the United States, where she emigrated in 1946. She produced fashion work for Vogue<\/em> and Vanity Fair<\/em> and made pictures for many Time-Life books. Her most lasting legacy, however, are the six location books (of which this is one) published primarily during the 1960s in a similar format. Near fine condition, in a price-clipped dustjacket with a little edgewear and tears. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ISRAEL. CAPA, Cornell. <\/strong>Israel\/The Reality: People, Places, Events in Memorable Photographs<\/em>, Cleveland: World Publishing Co., 1969. Hardcover (silver-stamped brown cloth), 12 \u00bc x 9 inches, unpaginated, 160 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Edited by Capa, with texts by Nelson Glueck, Karl Katz, and Moche Shamir. This is a nicely designed book, with image spanning the founding of Israel in 1948 through the 1960s. Over forty photographers contribute, among them Micha Bar-Am, Cornell and Robert Capa, Leonard Freed, Arnold Newman, and David Seymour (\u201cChim\u201d). Laid into this copy are three pieces of ephemera from the showing of the accompanying exhibition at New York\u2019s Jewish Museum in 1969. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with a few wrinkles and small tears. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. ISRAEL. CAPA, Robert. <\/strong>I. F. Stone, This is Israel<\/em>, New York: Boni and Baer, 1948. Hardcover (red and silver-stamped yellow cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00bd inches, 128 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \u201cHere is the first story of the Jewish war of independence and the birth of Israel, embodying the author\u2019s own observations and travels in Palestine during the fighting.\u201d The photographic reproductions were provided by Capa, Jerry Cooke, and Tim Gidal, all of whom have short biographies and a portrait on the back of the dustjacket. Light shelf wear, in dustjacket that is torn and missing small pieces. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ISRAEL. IZIS. <\/strong> Israel<\/em>, New York: Orion Press, 1958. Hardcover blue-stamped tan cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, 160 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Originally published three years earlier in Switzerland, this American edition celebrated the tenth anniversary of the founding of the state of Israel. It features a perceptive preface by Andre Malraux and frontispiece and dustjacket designs by Marc Chagall. Additional text comes from the Old and New Testaments, modern Hebrew poets, and other sources. Photographer Izis provides pictures of the young country and its people, rendered in rich gravure. Here are such sites as the hills of Nazareth and the Dead Sea, and Jewish men, women, and children building and enjoying Israel. Born Isra\u00eblis Bidermanas in Lithuania, Izis (1911-1980), worked most of his life in France as a photojournalist, including at the magazine Paris-Match<\/em>. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ITALY. ALINARI and Company.<\/strong> Virginia W. Johnson, Genoa the Superb, the City of Columbus<\/em>, Boston: Estes & Lauriat, 1892. Hardcover (red, blue, and gold-stamped white cloth), 8 \u00bc x 5 \u00be inches, 300 pages, 20 photogravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This is a narrative history of the Northern Italian city of Genoa, situated on the Mediterranean Sea and the birthplace of Christopher Columbus. Such books started to be written in great numbers in the middle of the nineteenth century, when thousands of Europeans embarked on their Grand Tours. The Alinari firm provided images of the city\u2019s highlights: the port, Columbus Monument, Palazzo Municipale, Cathedral of San Lorenzo, the Great Lighthouse, Staglieno Cemetery, and other spots. The plates are printed in rich photogravure and protected by tissue guards. Leopoldo Alinari (1832-1865) set up a photographic studio in Florence in 1852. Two years later his brothers Romualdo and Giuseppe joined, and Frataelli Alinari, Fotografi went on to become one of the largest photographic establishments in all of Europe. Their eventual stock of 70,000 negatives remains active to this day. Dedication page wrinkled, minor edgewear, two tiny holes in back cover, and browning to spine. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ITALY. BONNEY, Th\u00e9r\u00e8se.<\/strong> The Vatican<\/em>, Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., 1939. Hardcover (black-stamped red cloth), 10 \u00bc x 7 \u00bc inches, 132 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Comprises Bonney\u2019s visual and written examination of the architecture and inhabitants of the capital of the Roman Catholic Church. Among her subjects are Pius XI (the \u201cPope of Peace\u201d), St. Peter\u2019s, the Apostolic Palace, Vatican City, the Vatican Library, and the Castel Gandolfo (the Pope\u2019s summer residence). Th\u00e9r\u00e8se Bonney (1894-1978), a devoted war photographer and correspondent, was the first American allowed to make a photographic record of this subject. Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket with light edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ITALY. Ferrania<\/em>. <\/strong>December 1965, softcover, 12 \u00bc x 9 \u00bd inches, 126 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This special issue of the magazine commences with the article \u201cVia Senza Uscita?\u201d (\u201cDead End?\u201d) by Guido Bezzola. The full-page reproductions of contemporary work comprise primarily figure studies and landscapes, and each photographer is represented by a head shot and short biography. Slight edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ITALY. FRIEDLANDER.<\/strong> Lee Friedlander, Staglieno<\/em>, Tucson, Arizona: Nazraeli Press, 2002. Hardcover (printed paper and gray-stamped maroon velvet over boards), 11 \u00be x 11 \u00bc inches, 56 pages, 48 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This book represents a concentrated and unlikely body of work for Friedlander. It comprises his engagement with the statuary in the Staglieno cemetery near Genoa, Italy, encountered only because his wife, Maria, had relatives in the area. In 1992 and 1993 he photographed the site\u2019s decorated monuments and realistic statues with a keen sense of how the natural light fell on his immobile subjects. Curator Peter Galassi provides a foreword and Maria the afterword. Published without a dustjacket but in very tactile velvet, in an edition of 2,000 copies. Mint condition, in shrink wrap. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ITALY. LIST, Herbert. <\/strong>Rome<\/em>, New York: Hill and Wang, 1950. Hardcover (white-printed black cloth and paper over boards), 11 \u00bc x 9 inches, unpaginated, 84 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), slipcase.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              A decent travel book on the Italian capital, with captions by Hans Mollier and a foreword by Derek Verschoyle. The photographer focuses on famous monuments and street life, presenting a well-balanced visual essay. Herbert List (1903-1975) was known largely as a modernist photographer, but also produced much everyday work for magazines and books such as this one. Near fine condition, in printed cardboard slipcase with a few stains. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ITALY. LUKAS, Jan. <\/strong>Fountains of Rome<\/em>, London: Paul Hamlyn, 1974. Hardcover (gold-stamped cream cloth), 11 x 9 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                A substantial examination of the subject, with an introduction by Oldrich J. Blazicek. The fountain images are grouped according to their locations, in dominant positions, squares, streets, gardens, palaces, and courtyards. Light edgewear, in lightly worn dustjacket. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. ITALY. LISTA, Giovanni. <\/strong>Futurismo e Fotografia<\/em>, Milan: Multhipla Edizioni, 1979. Hardcover (paper over boards), 13 \u00be x 9 \u00be inches, 358 pages, 326 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Italian photographic futurism examined in a volume that is exhaustive in both its scale and length. The leaders of this avant-garde movement included Tato and Arturo Bragaglia. In addition to Lista\u2019s essay and hundreds of reproductions, the book presents over twenty texts of theory and criticism originally published between 1927 and 1944. Issued without a dustjacket in a machine-numbered edition of 1,000 copies. Top of spine and two corners lightly bumped, with a few indentations. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. ITALY. NAYA, Carlo.<\/strong> Italo Zannier, Venice, the Naya Collection<\/em>, Venice, Italy: O. B\u00f6hm, 1981. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 9 \u00bc x 11 \u00bc inches, 152 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This was the first historical and critical study of the Naya archive, comprising about 8,000 negatives. It traces the photographer\u2019s work in a lively milieu of photographers, publishers, and artists, serving as a history of both photography and Venice between 1850 and 1918. It includes a map of some 40 Venetian photography studios active during the time and examples of Naya\u2019s plate signatures. Carlo Naya (1816-1882) was based in Venice\u2019s Piazza San Marco and specialized in city scenes for tourists and copying works of art. He won awards at international expositions during the 1860s in Paris and London. Two corners lightly bumped, in dustjacket with wrinkles. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. ITALY. Rome in Early Photographs: The Age of Pius IX<\/em><\/strong>, Copenhagen, Denmark: Thorvaldsen Museum, 1977. Hardcover (brown-printed white paper over boards), 10 \u00bd x 8 \u00bd inches, 484 pages, 210 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This is a thoughtful, substantial study of photographs of Rome\u2019s architecture, ruins, people, and daily life, between 1846 and 1878. Every plate is accompanied by text about the subject\u2019s history and meaning. Biographies of over sixty-five photographers are provided, most of them unknown to even photographic historians. Among the recognizable names are Fratelli Alinari, Gioacchino Altobelli, Tommaso Cuccioni, Pompeo Molins, and Carlo Ponti. The essays address political and social conditions in Rome, the townscape of Rome, and the photographers\u2019 activities. Features an 18-x-24-inch fold-out map of Rome in 1847. Fine condition. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ITALY. SEYMOUR, David. <\/strong>Ann Carnahan, The Vatican: Behind the Scenes in the Holy City<\/em>, New York: Farrar Straus and Co., 1949. Hardcover (gold-stamped red and white cloth), 10 \u00bc x 8 inches, 192 pages, 150 halftone illustrations (1 in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Writer Carnahan covers the history and present-day workings of the Vatican, while Magnum photographer David Seymour (\u201cChim\u201d) provides the visuals. Jointly, they address St. Peter\u2019s Church, the Vatican\u2019s art, workers, trustees, and its first citizen, Pope Pius XII, and his followers. Bottom of spine lightly bumped, in dustjacket with edgewear, folds, and a small piece missing at the top of the spine. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. ITALY. SOMMER, Giorgio. <\/strong>Adam D. Weinberg, The Photographs of Giorgio Sommer<\/em>, Rochester, New York: Visual Studies Workshop, 1981. Softcover, 8 \u00be x 6 inches, 56 pages, 26 halftone illustrations. Signed, with ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This, the first monograph on the nineteenth-century Italian photographer, was Weinberg\u2019s master\u2019s thesis. Weinberg, who is now the director of New York\u2019s Whitney Museum of American Art, examines Sommer\u2019s German heritage, his studio\u2019s style, his casting business, and his costume and documentary photographs. He also includes a chronology and an index of Sommer\u2019s work in public collections. Giorgio Sommer (1834-1914) was a leading photographer for the Italian tourist trade and was most known for his images of Naples and Pompeii. Laid in is a sheet listing twenty extra catalog entries and a card indicating this was a complimentary copy from the author. This copy signed by Weinberg. Fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. ITALY. SOMMER, Giorgio<\/strong> (attribution). Pompeii<\/em>, New York: John Ireland, c. 1890. Hardcover (gold-stamped red cloth), 7 \u00bd x 5 inches, 48 pages, 10 photogravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This handbook was probably intended for school use and\/or armchair travel. It describes the history and daily life of the Italian city, the eruption of Mount Vesuvius, and the current ruins. The images, consistent with Sommer\u2019s work, show streets, courtyards, theaters, and other sites. Giorgio Sommer (1834-1914) was a leading photographer for the Italian tourist trade and was most known for his images of Naples and Pompeii. Ex-library copy, with worn covers, call number on the spine, and many internal markings. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. ITALY. STRAND, Paul. <\/strong>Cesare Zavattini, Un Paese<\/em>, Italy: Giulio Einaudi, 1955. Hardcover (red and black-stamped cream cloth), 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00bc inches, 106 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Strand and Zabattini\u2019s sensitive evocation of rural life in Italy. Most of the photographs are straightforward but insightful portraits, and Strand also turned his camera on a room full of new hats, a staircase, empty milk cans, tools, firewood, and fields. Rich gravure illustrations, with the famous \u201cLusetti Family\u201d image on the cover. Text in Italian. Near fine, in dustjacket with a little sunning, tiny edgewear, and a few tears. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. ITALY. WATSON, Wendy M.<\/strong> Images of Italy: Photography in the Nineteenth Century<\/em>, South Hadley, Massachusetts: Mount Holyoke College Art Museum, 1980. Softcover, 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00bd inches, 72 pages, 102 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                An understated exhibition catalog on the subject, with essay, bibliography and glossary of terms. All the reproductions are laid out alphabetically by photographer, with comments and biographical information. The nearly thirty photographers include Altobelli and Molins, Giacomo Brogi, Robert MacPherson, Ferdinand Ongania, and Giorgio Sommer. Printed in an edition of 2,000 copies. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. JAMAICA. YEAGER, Bunny.<\/strong> Camera in Jamaica<\/em>, New York: A. S. Barnes, 1967. Hardcover (silver-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, 182 pages, halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  An unusual subject for Yeager, as it deals primarily with the culture and clothed inhabitants of a foreign place. Nonetheless, she manages to slip in a number of her typical female nudes. The book is the result of three trips to the island, the first of which was on assignment for the location shooting of the James Bond film \u201cDr. No,\u201d which yielded some of the candid shots of Sean Connery included here. Near fine condition, in rubbed and wrinkled dustjacket. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. JAPAN. Art Photography in Japan, 1920-1940<\/em><\/strong>, New York: Charles Schwartz and Howard Greenberg Gallery, 2003. Softcover, 10 x 8 \u00bd inches, 64 pages, 34 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This dealers\u2019 exhibition catalog includes the essays \u201cPictorialism in Japan\u201d by Christian A. Peterson and \u201cPoetry of Light: Writings on Japanese Pictorial Photography\u201d by Kerry Ross, and thirteen biographies. The pictures comprise primarily landscapes, still lifes, figure studies, and urban scenes, some with modernist tendencies. A useful addition to the dearth of information on Asian pictorialists available in the West. Fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. JAPAN. ASHIYA CAMERA CLUB.<\/strong> Art in Ashiya: Ashiya Camera Club, 1930-1942<\/em>, Ashiya, Japan: Ashiya City Museum of Art and History, 1998. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 \u00bc inches, 204 pages, 110 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This exhibition catalog features the work of twenty-nine members of the Ashiya Camera Club, most of it very modernist in its pictorial sensibility. There are still lifes, nudes, and abstractions, sometimes rendered via the photogram and multiple exposure. Features an overview of the club and numerous installation shots of its exhibitions. A scarce publication. Text in Japanese. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. JAPAN. BEASLEY, Doug.<\/strong> Japan: A Nisei\u2019s First Encounter<\/em>, St. Paul, Minnesota: Vision Quest, 2000. Softcover, 6 \u00bd x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 32 duotone illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Comprises a selection of photographs that Minnesota-based Beasley made on his first trip to the homeland of his mother. They are straightforward images of Japanese shrines, architecture, landscape, and people. Beasley wrote in the introduction that \u201cupon arriving in Tokyo, I felt I had returned<\/em> to a place I had never been; the sights, sounds and smells were unique, exotic and new, yet comfortable and oddly familiar.\u201d The book features glassine endpapers and a seemingly hand-bound binding of string piercing the pages and wrapping around the spine. This copy signed by Beasley. Near fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. JAPAN. BENGE, Harvey.<\/strong> You Are Here<\/em>, Cologne, Germany: Schaden, 2006. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 8 \u00be x 6 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, color halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Benge\u2019s street photographs of Tokyo, in the snapshot aesthetic and presented as full-page bleed images. According to his website, Benge (born in 1944 in New Zealand), is \u201cinterested in the international urban social landscape and the notion of parallel lives. While something is happening here, something else is happening over there.\u201d Limited to 250 signed copies, although I see no signature in this one. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. JAPAN. BRISTOL, Horace. <\/strong>Japan<\/em>, Tokyo: East-West at Toppan Press, 1949. Case (black cloth with label and clasps), 7 \u00bd x 7 \u00bd inches, 14 booklets, each with 16 pages and halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Among the subjects of the booklets are Lacquer, Rice, Pearls, Geisha, and Silk. One follows a typical young Japanese couple on their honeymoon, one covers Tokyo, and another essays the island of Hatsushima, inhabited by Communists and bare-chested fishing women. A nice presentation and package. Tiny wear to two tips, with original price tag ($2.90) and light browning to the edges of the booklet covers. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. JAPAN. BRISTOL, Horace. <\/strong>Japan<\/em>, Tokyo: East-West at Toppan Press, 1952. Case (gold-stamped blue cloth with clasp), 8 \u00bd x 7 \u00bd inches, 12 booklets, each with 16 pages and halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This is the second edition of the above, apparently with the same text and reproductions. However, the slightly larger page size now allows for captions for each illustration. Bristol tightened up his subject matter in this edition, eliminating the booklets on Hatsushima and the Geisha. Covers slightly light-struck and missing one clasp. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. JAPAN. A Century of Japanese Photography<\/em><\/strong>, New York: Pantheon, 1980. Hardcover (black and silver-stamped black cloth), 8 \u00be x 12 inches, 388 pages, 514 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), slipcase.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                First published in Japan by the Japan Photographers Association, this was the first comprehensive history of the subject available in the West. It commences with salted-paper prints and ambrotypes from the 1850s and ends with the horrors of World War II. In between are well-chosen examples of news, propaganda, advertising, art, avant-garde, and war photography in the country. With an introduction by American professor John W. Dower, the book \u201cillustrates for the first time just how the greatest non-Western photographic tradition developed and changed over time as well as all the social contradictions and historical ironies of Japan itself.\u201d Near fine condition, in printed slipcase with minor wear. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. JAPAN. The Founding and Development of Modern Photography in Japan<\/em><\/strong>, Tokyo Metropolitan Museum of Photography, 1995. Softcover, 10 \u00be x\u00a08 \u00bd inches, 288 pages, full-color halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This substantial exhibition catalog features an essay by museum curator Akiko Okatsuka, in both Japanese and English. Includes work by nearly eighty key figures, with biographies. Significant Japanese photography books and periodicals are also represented and illustrated, among them Mesemi<\/em> by Y. Simozato, Nippon<\/em>, Front<\/em>, and Travel in Japan<\/em>. Tiny edgewear. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. JAPAN. HAAR, Francis. <\/strong>P. D. Perkins, Geisha of Pontocho<\/em>, Tokyo News Service, 1954. Hardcover (stamped pink cloth and paper over boards), 10 \u00bd x\u00a07 \u00bd inches, 196 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    An examination of the Geisha Girl phenomenon in Pontocho, the home of renowned dancers and musicians in the ancient capital of Kyoto. Gives a history and current status of the district, where most of the activity is at night. Includes a color fold-out map of Pontocho, both old and new. American photographer Francis Haar (born 1908) has work in the permanent collections of two U.S. museums, including the Art Institute of Chicago. Wear to edges of paper over boards. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh. <\/strong>Original photograph. Man <\/em>and Woman #20<\/em>, 1961, gelatin silver print, 35 x 39 \u00bd inches.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This is one of Hosoe\u2019s most well-known figure studies, showing a woman\u2019s head with a man\u2019s arm wrapped around it. This print was used in a Shinnyo Daiko (traditional drumming) performance at the 1998 Oracle conference of photography curators in Japan. It was torn up at the end of the performance, and it remains in six sections, with a few small pieces missing. Undoubtedly, a unique item, given its provenance. Image sent upon request. $1,000<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh. <\/strong>Man and Woman<\/em>, Tokyo: Camera Art, 1961. Hardcover (paper over boards), 9 \u00bd x 7 \u00bc inches, 60 pages, 32 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket and slipcase. Signed ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This is one of Hosoe\u2019s most elegant books, small in scale and richly printed in gravure. The images, primarily of nude women, frequently bleed off the page and appear somewhat abstracted. Text in Japanese. Lacking the English translation booklet. Laid into this copy is a 1998 letter signed by Hosoe. Near fine condition, in original printed slipcase. $1,250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh. <\/strong>Killed by Roses<\/em>, Tokyo: Shueisha, 1963. Hardcover (printed cloth), 16 \u00be x 11 inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, acetate jacket and cardboard box. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This is one of Hosoe\u2019s most elaborate books, over-sized, richly printed, and featuring some gatefolds. His collaborator was the author Yukio Michima, who is the subject of most of the pictures, rendered surrealistically and with strong graphic impact. Issued in an edition of 1,500 numbered copies (this one 586), signed by both Michima and Hosoe. Near fine condition, in worn (as usual) box. $4,000<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh. <\/strong>Betty Jean Lifton, A Dog\u2019s Guide to Tokyo<\/em>, New York: W. W. Norton, 1969. Hardcover (green and black-stamped red cloth),\u00a011 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Signed ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This is a playful book, using a dog to teach children the rudiments of Japanese life. Hosoe\u2019s pictures show a silver poodle eating, bedding down, sightseeing, visiting shrines, at a public bath, and doing other activities in Tokyo. Eikoh Hosoe (born 1933), better known for his figurative work, produced another book with Lifton on a dog in Japan. Laid into this copy is a 1998 letter signed by Hosoe. Near fine condition. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh. <\/strong>BA\u2022RA\u2022KEI: Ordeal by Roses<\/em>, New York: Aperture, 1985. Hardcover (silver-stamped purple cloth), 14 \u00bd x 10 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket, bellyband. Signed ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Initially issued in Japan in 1971, this is the first Western edition of Hosoe\u2019s photographic essay on the renowned Japanese writer Yukio Mishima. The high-contrast pictures, grouped into five sections, reveal the subject\u2019s inner and outer worlds, in a highly surrealistic fashion. Includes a preface by Mishima, afterword by Mark Holborn, and notes by the photographer. Eikoh Hosoe (born 1933) is known for his figurative work and remains today Japan\u2019s most recognized creative photographer. Laid into this copy is a 1998 letter signed by Hosoe. Near fine condition. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh. <\/strong>Betty Jean Lifton, Taka-chan and I: A Dog\u2019s Journey to Japan<\/em>, Tokyo: Chihiro Ishizu, 1997. Hardcover (black-stamped red paper over boards), 10 \u00bd x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations, dustjacket and bellyband. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                A children\u2019s book about a Weimaraner that digs a hole all the way through the earth, to Japan. The dog befriends a young Japanese girl and rescues her from a dragon. This is the first Japanese edition of Taka-chan<\/em>, which was originally published in the United States in 1967. Though slightly smaller, it largely follows the layout of the first. Eikoh Hosoe (born 1933), better known for his figurative work, produced another book with Lifton on a dog in Japan. Text in Japanese. This copy is also signed by Hosoe in gold ink on the half-title page. Near fine condition. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh. <\/strong>Kamaitachi<\/em>, New York: Aperture, 2005. Hardcover (printed cloth), 15 x 12 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 34 tri-tone illustrations, glassine dustjacket, box. Signed ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Another oversize and deluxe publication illustrated by Hosoe. This one was a collaboration with the dancer Tatsumi Hijikata, who performed a series of \u201chappenings\u201d in the Japanese countryside, invoking the aura of the Kamaitachi, legendary Japanese tricksters. The book features 34 gatefold bleed images, hidden by dense blue pages. Issued in a signed, numbered edition of 500 in Japan and 500 in the U.S., in a Pop-Art-designed clamshell box. Laid into this copy is a 1998 letter signed by Hosoe. Mint condition, in original plastic bag. $750<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh. <\/strong>Deadly Ashes<\/em>, Tokyo: Mado-Sha Publishing, 2007. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 9 inches, 120 pages, duotone illustrations, dustjacket, and bellyband. Signed ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This is Hosoe\u2019s haunting tribute to the dead of Pompeii, Auschwitz, Nagasaki, and Hiroshima. At each site he variously photographed bones, memorials, \u201cnothingness,\u201d and other reminders of the tragedies of the natural and man-made disasters. With an introduction by professor Robert Jay Lifton and text by the photographer. Laid into this copy is a 1998 letter signed by Hosoe. Near fine condition. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. JAPAN. HOSOE, Eikoh.<\/strong> Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Dear Oracle Member<\/em>, Japan: Kiyosato Museum of Photographic Arts, 1988. Form letter,\u00a0signed by Hosoe. In mailed envelope, with brochure.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Dear Oracle Member<\/em>, Japan: Kiyosato Museum of Photographic Arts, 1988. Form letter,\u00a0signed by Hosoe. Different from the above.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Season\u2019s Greetings and Best Wishes for the New Year<\/em>, Japan: Kiyosato Museum of Photographic\u00a0Arts, 1988. Holiday card, signed by the staff of the museum, including Hosoe, the\u00a0director. In mailed envelope.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Letter, February 17, 1999. Typed and signed letter from Hosoe, about postcards of his\u00a0images, on his letterhead.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Eikoh Hosoe: The Awakenings Portfolio<\/em>, New York: Aperture, 2001. Prospectus for the\u00a0portfolio of five photogravures.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Eikoh Hosoe: Telling Stories<\/em>, New York: Howard Greenberg Gallery, 2001. Exhibition\u00a0Announcement, in mailed envelope. Card and envelope signed by Hosoe.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Postcards. Six (6) cards with Hosoe images, all signed by him.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Business cards. Three (3) different cards for Hosoe, one signed.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Group of 15 items, most signed. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. JAPAN. HURLIMANN, Martin. <\/strong>Kyoto<\/em>, New York: Viking Press, 1961. Hardcover (gold-stamped green cloth), 10 x 7 inches, 180 pages, 132 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        With an introductory text and historical notes by the photographer. H\u00fcrlimann presents the undeveloped Kyoto as a microcosm and reflection of historical Japan. He pictures its imperial palaces, Buddhist temples and monasteries, Shinto shrines, formal gardens, public parks, and the austere Zen rock-gardens. Previous owner\u2019s marks and price tag, in price-clipped dustjacket with a little edgewear. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. JAPAN. Japanese Ambrotypes: 1860-1890<\/em><\/strong>, New York: Charles Schwartz, 2009. Softcover, 8 x 9 \u00bd inches, 38 pages, full-color halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Drawn from Schwartz\u2019s personal collection, these ambrotypes are primarily studio portraits. Among the subjects are a priest, dwarf, samurai, and a Geisha with children. Some of the subjects and some of the photographers are known. The more unusual images feature a man being pulled in a rickshaw (on the cover), an outdoor scene of a merchant with his family, and four men playing a game of \u201cgo\u201d (similar to chess). Near fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. JAPAN. KEENE, Donald. <\/strong>Living Japan<\/em>, Garden City, New York: Doubleday, 1959. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, 224 pages, 158 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Columbia University professor Keene\u2019s in-depth and accessible study of Japan, covering its history, religion, economy, government, education, arts, and other topics. Heavily illustrated in high-quality gravures by Werner Bischof, Robert Capa, Eliot Elisofon, and Ken Heyman, plus such leading Japanese photographers as Yoichi Midorikawa and Hiroshi Hamaya. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. JAPAN. KLEIN, William. <\/strong>Tokyo<\/em>, New York: Crown, 1964. Hardcover (white and red-stamped black cloth), 14 x 10 \u00bc inches, 184 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              According to the inside flap, this is a \u201cbook of magnificent photographs. Here is<\/em> Tokyo. Not Tokyo for the tourist or Tokyo for travel posters, but everyday Tokyo in all its contradictions, discords, beauty, and appeal.\u201d This copy inscribed and signed by Klein. Tiny wear to tips, in price-clipped dustjacket with a few tears and chips. $1,250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. JAPAN. Modern Photography in Japan: 1915-1940<\/em><\/strong>, San Francisco: Friends of Photography, 2001. Softcover, 10 x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, full-color halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Attractive exhibition catalog with essay by historian Kaneko Ryuichi. Includes the work of over thirty photographers, all with short biographies. Among those present are Shoji Ueda, Gingo Hanawa, Roso and Shinzo Fukuhara, and Yasuzo Nojima (whose image graces the cover). Light rubbing to covers. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. JAPAN. MORINAGA, Jun. <\/strong>River, Its Shadow of Shadows<\/em>, Tokyo: Yugensha, 1978. Hardcover (white-stamped brown cloth), 12 x 10 \u00be inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Apparently Morinaga\u2019s only book, it is a tour-de-force<\/em> of design. His images, made in the 1960s, are gritty impressions of polluted water, as if produced by a demonic Minor White. They are printed in high-contrast tones and often presented as gatefolds. Morinaga (born 1937) assisted W. Eugene Smith when the great photojournalist was in Japan working on his \u201cMinamata\u201d project, and Smith contributes some text to this book. Issued by the same concern that published two important Japanese books by Robert Frank. Fine condition, in original slipcase (printed paper over boards) and plain cardboard shipping container. $750<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. JAPAN. MORIYAMA, Daido. <\/strong>Shinjuku<\/em>, Tucson: Nazraeli Press, 2002. Softcover, 9 \u00be x 7 \u00bc inches, 608 pages, 608 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket, folder, and slipcase. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Shinjuku is a dense, trendy, and gritty section of Tokyo that Moriyama has photographed for years. His high-contrast street pictures are often dense and disorienting, printed in rich gravure and bleeding off the pages. Moriyama (born 1938) is one of Japan\u2019s most influential photographers from the late twentieth century. Includes the original folded sheet with text by the photographer in Japanese and English. This is one of the first printing of 500 copies, each signed in silver ink by Moiryama, in original slipcase. Fine condition, in shrink wrap. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. JAPAN. NOMURA SHOJI KABUSHIKI KAISHA<\/strong>. 30th Anniversary<\/em>, Kobe: Nomura Shoji Kabushiki Kaisha, 1963. Hardcover (white and gold-stamped orange cloth), 10 \u00bd x 7 \u00bc inches, 36 pages, 13 tipped-in silver prints and 12 color halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Prepared for the Nomura firm\u2019s 30th anniversary, it contains much information on this lumber importer, which was the sole Japanese company licensed to sell wood from the British Borneo Timber Company. The original photographs include portraits of the founding and current presidents, a two-part aerial view of its coastal facility, and of lumber being logged and transported by truck. The text features letters of congratulations from other companies, a history of Nomura, and a few graphs and charts tracking the quantity of its annual imports, all printed on a flecked Japanese paper. The last section features descriptions of twelve types of Borneo wood with tipped-in reproductions of cross-sections, which convincingly look very much like actual slivers of wood. One page loose, with minor wear to cover. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. JAPAN. The Pictorial Landscape in Japanese Photography<\/em><\/strong>, Tokyo Metropolitan Museum of Photography, 1992. Softcover, 10 \u00bd x 8 \u00bd inches, 140 pages, 105 duotone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This tasteful exhibition catalog addresses the great success that Japanese pictorialists achieved photographing in nature, with an essay by curator Ryuichi Kaneko. The understated, softly focused images date from about 1906 to the early 1940s. Among the thirty-one pictorialists represented are Gesshu Ogawa and the brothers Roso and Shinzo Fukuhara. Bilingual essay in Japanese and English. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. JAPAN. SHIGETA, Harry K.<\/strong> Harry K. Shigeta<\/em>, Japan, 1991. Softcover,\u00a09 \u00bd x 9 \u00bd inches, 104 pages, 84 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This rarely seen first monograph on Shigeta features a few short essays and chronology on the photographer. The pictures date from 1920 to 1950 and represent both his pictorial and professional work. His creative imagery includes still lifes, landscapes, figure studies, and some riveting modernist-inspired female nudes. His advertising pictures promote soap, shoes, beer, and other products. Includes a graphically strong self-portrait, reminiscent of one by Edward Steichen, due to the prominence of lighting equipment. Japanese-born Harry K. Shigeta (1887-1963) made his name as an interdisciplinary and widely liked photographer in Chicago primarily between the World Wars. His studio, Shigeta-Wright, specialized in experimental illustration and food photography. He was a leading pictorialist, teaching fellow camera-club members in Chicago and exhibiting in salons throughout the country. Text in Japanese, except for English captions. Fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. JAPAN. SHIGETA, Harry K.<\/strong> Harry K. Shigeta: Life and Photographs<\/em>, Ueda, Japan: Ueda City Board of Education, 2003. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 \u00be inches, 72 pages, 59 halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Another scarce publication (in this country) on Shigeta, accompanying an exhibition in the city of his birth. The text by Yuko Fujishiro covers his early life in Japan, schooling in St. Paul, career in Chicago, and last years in Los Angeles. Features many images of Shigeta working and with groups of photographers and a good selection of his artistic pictures such as the swelling nude on the cover. The color images are of his commercial food set ups and a painting he made of Abraham Lincoln. All of the text, including a detailed chronology, is bilingual in Japanese and English. Fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. JAPAN. SMITH, W. Eugene and Aileen M. <\/strong>Minamata<\/em>, New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1975. Hardcover (white and blind-stamped red leatherette), 11 \u00be x 9 \u00be inches, 192 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This was Smith\u2019s last major project before he died three years later and is his most searing. It documents individual residents of the southern Japanese fishing town of Minamata, where a chemical plant dumped mercury into the water. People died and many children were born severely deformed, among them Tomoko Uemura, whose image being bathed by her mother is the book\u2019s signature picture. Working with his wife Aileen, Smith also photographed protests, and other events related to the chemical company. Ends with a chilling ten-page medical report on the mercury poisoning. Near fine condition, in price-clipped dustjacket with a tear and tiny edgewear. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. JORDON. GOWIN, Emmet. <\/strong>Petra: In the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordon<\/em>, New York: Pace\/McGill Gallery, 1986. Softcover, 14 x 11 inches, 40 pages, 14 duotone illustrations, dustjacket.\u00a0\u00a0 Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This elegant, oversize publication chronicles the ancient capital of a pre-Islamic Arab culture that flourished from the fourth century B.C. to the sixth century A.D. Subsequently lost to the outside world until 1812, it was photographed by Gowin between 1982 and 1985. With a large-format camera and a keen eye, he examines the passageways, rock formations, tombs, and palaces of the \u201ccity of rose-red stone.\u201d Features an introduction by Gowin, an historical essay by anthropology professor Phillip C. Hammond, and a dustjacket with a tipped-on reproduction. A hard-to-find title, this copy is discretely signed by Gowin after his text. Faint scuff to front cover, in opened shrink wrap. $650<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. KENYA. BEARD, Peter. <\/strong>Longing for Darkness: Kamante\u2019s Tales from Out of Africa<\/em>, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1975. Hardcover (printed paper over boards), 12 \u00bc x 8 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations (some in color), dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This journal-like book, combines photographs by Beard and Isak Dinesen (Karen Blixen) with the stories of Dinesen\u2019s lead servant, Kamante, along with his fanciful drawings. It comprises Kamante\u2019s version of Blixen\u2019s classic book Out of Africa<\/em>, told in a personal and enlightening manner. Beard idolized Dinesen to the point of buying land next to her estate outside of Nairobi, Kenya, and befriending Kamante. Demonstrating how well connected Beard was, he got Jacqueline (Kennedy) Onassis to write an afterword for the book. This copy with drawings and an inscription by Beard. Previous owner\u2019s inscription, mild edgewear, and chipping and tears to dustjacket. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. KOREA. BRISTOL, Horace. <\/strong>Korea<\/em>, Tokyo: Toppon Press, 1948. Hardcover (black cloth with label), 9 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The title pages proclaims this a \u201cphotographic report on a country whose fate is being decided today and some of the people who will decide it.\u201d Published two years before the outbreak of the Korean War, the book commences with portraits of the commander of U.S. forces in Korea, the chief of the Soviet delegation, and the leading Korean politician Kim Ku Sic. Following are Bristol\u2019s images of native Koreans at the daily market, tending rice paddies, playing \u201cgo,\u201d reading publically posted newspapers, performing classical dance, producing silk, and other daily activities. Rice paper endpapers. Tiny wear to a few tips. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. LATVIA. Fotografijai 150<\/em><\/strong>, Riga: Latvian Photo Art Society, 1989. Softcover, 8 \u00be x 13 \u00bc inches, 64 pages, 80 halftone illustrations (some in color).<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Issued about the time that the Baltic state of Latvia freed itself from the Soviet Union, this publication celebrated the sesquicentennial of photography with an exhibition drawn from five continents. Among the Latvian photographers included, presumably the country\u2019s leading workers, were Bruno Alsins, Zigurds Bilzonis, and Ilga Suna. The imagery ranges from nudes to still lifes to street scenes. Introduction by the president of the Latvian Photo Art Society, in Latvian, Russian, and English. Light wear to covers. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. LEBANON. PESEK, Ludek. <\/strong>Lebanon: Cedars, Temples and Palaces<\/em>, Prague: Artia, 1965. Hardcover (green-stamped green cloth), 11 x 9 \u00bd inches, 72 pages, 64 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        As the title suggests, Pesek turns his camera on the trees and architecture, both ancient and modern, in this now troubled Middle-Eastern country. Attractive endpapers of tree bark and often full-bleed plates. Tiny shelf wear, in dustjacket that is torn and worn. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. LITHUANIA. MACIJAUSKAS, Aleksandras.<\/strong> My Lithuania<\/em>, New York: Thames and Hudson, 1991. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 10 \u00be x 9 \u00be inches, 144 pages, 116 duotone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Macijauskas\u2019s four main bodies of work, made from the mid-1960s to mid-1980s and selected by Czech photo-historians Daniela Mr\u00e1kova and Vladimir Reme\u0161 (with an afterword by them). Insightful images of Lithuania, grouped: \u201cVillage Markets,\u201d \u201cSummer,\u201d \u201cThe Veterinary Clinic,\u201d and \u201cParades.\u201d Includes perhaps his most recognizable image of a donkey being strapped to a wall for treatment at the vet clinic. With the photographer\u2019s own 1990 commentary, written shortly before the small Baltic state declared its independence from Russia. I can\u2019t pronounce his name either, but Aleksandras Macijauskas (1915-2004) is Lithuania\u2019s most well-known contemporary photographer, working primarily on the street. He was a founding member of his country\u2019s Photographic Art Society under Soviet rule. In 1972, he was invited to exhibit at the Arles Festival in France, initiating a number of successful solo shows in Europe and the U.S. Laid in is an announcement for the book on the back of which Macijauskas has written his name and address and a card reproducing one of his images inscribed and dated 1992 by him, both in a mailed envelope from him in Lithuania. This is the only book on the photographer, with great ephemera. Fine condition, in opened shrink wrap. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. LITHUANIA. SUTKUS, Antanas. <\/strong>Vilnius on Weekdays<\/em>, Vilnius: Leidykla Mintis, 1965. Hardcover (red and black-stamped gray cloth), 10 \u00bd x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 258 screen-gravure and 2 color halftone illustrations. Signed ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This book, produced during the era when Lithuania was part of Soviet Russia, presents the people, buildings, activities, work, and weather of the country\u2019s capital city. \u201cRead Vilnius like a book: square after square, street after street. Look at its features closely as you would look at the face of a person dear to you. You will come to love it.\u201d About half of the photographs were supplied by Romualdas Rakauskas (born 1941) and the other half by Antanas Sutkus (born 1939), a leading photographer of his generation. He is best known for his long-term documentation of the common folk of Lithuania, begun in 1976. Includes the booklet with text and captions in no less than six languages, including Russian and English. Importantly, laid into this copy is a Russian banknote signed by Sutkus and his address handwritten on a piece of paper. Previous owner\u2019s inscription, corners bumped, and missing dustjacket. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. MEXICO. ALVAREZ BRAVO, Manuel. <\/strong> Revelaciones: The Art of Manuel Alvarez Bravo<\/em>, San Diego: Museum of Photographic Arts, 1990. Softcover with tipped-on reproduction, 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, 134 pages, 54 halftone illustrations. Signed, with ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Revelaciones<\/em> was the catalog for a traveling exhibition, presented at eight American museums. It includes an introduction by MOPA director Arthur Ollman, an essay by Nissan N. Perez, and a chronology of the artist; all text bilingual in both English and Spanish. Signed by Joseph Bellows, the designer, who also indicates the book was printed in an edition of 2,500 copies. A subsequent printing did not have the cover illustration tipped-on. This copy is accompanied by a press packet for the show. Fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. MEXICO. BLOCH, Ricardo. <\/strong> Terremoto<\/em>, St. Paul, Minnesota: Ricardo Bloch, 1993. Hardcover (paper covered boards), 8 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 56 pages, halftone illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This, Bloch\u2019s second artist\u2019s book, comprises straightforward photographs of the aftermath of a major earthquake that struck Mexico City on September 19, 1985. Most of the pictures are people-less, but the text is heart-wrenchingly personal, written in the voice of a child or adult not fully fluent in English. One page begins with the text, \u201cThe groun trembelt an shook an bildings sweyd like Alamo trees and walls fell over an floors caved in.\u201d Bloch was born in Mexico City in 1946, took a Ph.D. in biophysics from Harvard University, and has worked as an artist in Minnesota and Paris. Terremoto<\/em>, issued without a dustjacket, was printed in an edition of 400 copies; this one is numbered and signed by Bloch. Fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. MEXICO. CHARNAY, D\u00e9sir\u00e9. <\/strong>Keith F. Davis, D\u00e9sir\u00e9 Charnay: Expeditionary Photographer<\/em>, Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1981. Hardcover (copper-stamped white cloth), 10 \u00bc x 8 \u00bc inches, 212 pages, 124 halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  A lively account of the late nineteenth-century photographs of Charnay (1828-1915), whose work was previously unknown to the American public. He was the first to photograph the Mayan ruins in Mexico and later worked in Madagascar, Java, and Australia, picturing both architecture and native inhabitants. The book serves as a useful history of photography, anthropology, and archaeology. Laid into this copy is the author\u2019s signed business card. Near fine, in dustjacket that has a short tear and a few tiny wrinkles. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. MEXICO. HACKENSMID, Alexander. <\/strong>John Steinbeck, The Forgotten Village<\/em>, New York: Viking, 1941. Hardcover (green-stamped cream cloth), 10 \u00bc x 7 \u00bc inches, 144 pages, 136 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Second printing. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This book tells the story of a young boy and his family, as modern medicine comes to their Mexican pueblo. The images are stills from a film by the same name, which was written by Steinbeck, directed and produced by Herbert Kline, and co-directed by Alexander Hackensmid, who also was the director of photography. They show the villagers farming, celebrating traditions, and adapting to the new science. Czech-born Alexandr Hackenschmied (1907-2004) created experimental films in his native country before settling in Hollywood at the beginning of World War II. Shortening his name to Hackensmid and then Hammid, he went on to have a long career making documentary and Imax films. Laid into this copy is an issue of The Book League Review<\/em> that devotes the cover and first two pages to The Forgotten Village<\/em>. Endpapers glue stained (as is usual), minor browning to the dustjacket. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. MEXICO. LIEBERMAN, Archie. <\/strong>The Mummies of Guanajuato<\/em>, New York: Harry N. Abrams, 1978. Hardcover (gold-stamped black cloth), 12 x 9 \u00be inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      The sleepy Mexican town of Guanajuato has a cemetery with exhumed human bodies that were dug up because relatives could not afford to pay for maintenance of their graves. They are lined up in standing position with ghoulish, contorted faces, some still clothed and with facial hair. Lieberman photographed them in a straightforward manner, surrounded by darkness and rendered in deep gravure in the book. So fascinating are these \u201cliving dead\u201d that noted author Ray Bradbury agreed to write a chilling short story expressly for this book. Previous owner\u2019s name and address, otherwise near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. MONACO. VENNEMANN, Wolfgang. <\/strong>Monte Carlo: Visions Photographiques<\/em>, Cannes, France: Robaudy, 1936. Softcover, 12 x 9 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        A nice photo-essay on the gambling hub of the microstate of Monaco, gracefully located on the Mediterranean. Venneman, a German photographer active largely in Africa during the 1920s and thirties, presents the area\u2019s beautiful natural setting, its streets and palace, and visitors swimming, golfing, and playing tennis. Most seductive, of course, is Monte Carlo\u2019s night life, offering eating, drinking, and playing the roulette wheels. A few of the photographs have people collaged-in, and the first illustration in the book is a map, using similar techniques and appearing somewhat modernist. Text, in French, by Maurice Bedel. Light wear and browning to covers. $125<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. NEW ZEALAND. New Zealand Pictorialists<\/em><\/strong>, Newtown, Wellington: New Zealand Centre for Photography, 1991. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 \u00bc inches, 12 pages, 6 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This is the catalog for a traveling exhibition on the subject, apparently the first of its kind. Features an essay on the movement, as seen through photographs, periodicals, clubs, and exhibitions. The checklist includes work from 1905 to as late as the 1960s, with biographies of thirty photographers, from Matheson Beaumont to Rhona Wheelhouse, none of them known in the United States. The chronology of 1892-1967 is equally encompassing. Near fine condition. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. NICARAGUA. MEISELAS, Susan.<\/strong> Nicaragua: June 1978\u2013July 1979<\/em>, London: Writers and Readers Publishing Cooperative, 1981. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 9 \u00be x 11 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 71 color halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Magnum photographer Meiselas\u2019s important chronicle of the Nicaraguan revolution in the late 1970s. She photographed the Somoza regime, the insurrection, and the final offensive. Includes interviews with principle figures and a chronology of the country beginning with its founding in 1524. This copy signed and dated 2004 by Meiselas. Near fine condition. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. NICARAGUA. MEISELAS, Susan.<\/strong> Nicaragua: June 1978\u2013July 1979<\/em>, New York: Pantheon, 1981. Softcover, 8 \u00bd x 11 inches, unpaginated, 71 color halftone illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              The American softcover edition of the above. This copy signed and dated 2001 by Meisales. A little edgewear. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. NORTH POLE. NARES, George S.<\/strong> Narrative of a Voyage to the Polar Sea, <\/em>London: Sampson Low, Marston, Searle, and Rivington, 1878. Hardcovers (gold and black-stamped green cloth), 2 volumes, 9 x 6 inches, 396 pages (each), 6 mounted woodburytypes.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Captain Nares\u2019 account of the North Pole expedition of two English ships during the season of 1875-1876. In the preface he admits that they did not reach their goal and indicates that the photographs were made by paymaster F. Mitchell and engineer George White. The rich, full-page woodburytypes depict the ships ominously ensconced in snow and ice, at Floeberg Beach, Cape Beechey, and Discovery Bay (with pitched tents), and serenely afloat in Cape Prescott. Only one crew member appears in the photographs, standing on a floeberg and peering up at large-scale \u201cpressed-up rubble ice.\u201d In addition to the photographic illustrations are woodcuts, diagrams, and fold-out maps. Mounts of each frontispiece browned (due to tissue guard, but not effecting the prints), some loose signatures, and covers worn. Two volume set: $1,000<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. NORWAY. WILSE, Anders B.<\/strong> Stemninger fra Norges Kyst<\/em>, Oslo (Kristiania): Mittet & Co, c. 1900. Hardcover (green cloth and paper over boards, with tipped-on original photograph), 9 \u00bd x 12 inches, 48 pages, 24 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This book has a handsome cover, with a design of green organic forms that frame the gold-printed title and, most importantly, an actual silver print affixed. The photograph is a 2-x-6-inch panorama of water, mountains, a ship, and the midnight sun, in brown tones. The title translates as \u201cMoods of the Norwegian Coast.\u201d There is no text and the 24 reproductions are all presented full page, with captions in Norwegian, English, and a third language. All of them show coastal waters, variously with land, boats, ships, and occasional figures. Among them is the cover image, with more imagery in the sky above and the water below, credited to Wilse. Of these two dozen halftones, nineteen are credited to this photographer. Anders B. Wilse (1865-1949) attended technical school in Norway but immigrated to the United States in 1884 as a railway engineer. In 1898 he began his professional career with the camera and advertised himself as a \u201cscenic photographer.\u201d A few years later he returned to his native country and established himself as a portraitist in Oslo. He also photographic ships and made views all over Norway for popular consumption, work that won him government honors. Light wear and spotting to covers. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. PALESTINE. McCULLIN, Donald. <\/strong>Jonathan Dimbleby, The Palestinians<\/em>, London: Quartet Books, 1979. Hardcover (silver-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00bc x\u00a07 \u00be inches, 256 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This book gives a voice to Palestinian individuals, \u201cto the old men who were children when the Balfour Declaration prepared the way for the exodus from Palestine; to the children who were born in the diaspora and who are now willing to contemplate certain death in a guerilla war rather than surrender the right to their homeland. Through them the book explores the crises of a people without a land, demonstrating that the \u2018Palestinian problem\u2019 is not an abstract issue but an urgent human tragedy.\u201d After a section of historical photographs, McCullin\u2019s insightful journalistic images enliven and illustrate the text. Published over 35 years ago, this searing Middle-East situation seems to have not improved. Near fine condition. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. PERU. CAPA, Cornell. <\/strong>Matthey Huxley, Farewell to Eden<\/em>, New York: Harper & Row, 1964. Hardcover (gold-stamped orange and green cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, 244 pages, 148 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This is the story of the Amahuaca Indians in a remote region of northern Peru, whose stone-age society was giving way to intrusions by white civilization. Huxley and Capa cover the daily routines of their subjects, who go largely unclothed. They log, gather bananas, perform rituals, but some also attend school and acquire manufactured goods. Printed in rich gravure, with many images bleeding off the edges of the pages. Light shelf wear, in dustjacket with mild edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. PERU. VERGER, Pierre. <\/strong>Indians of Peru<\/em>, Lake Forest, Illinois: Pocahontas Press, 1950. Hardcover (red and white-stamped black cloth), 9 x 8 inches, unpaginated, 87 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Text by museum director Luis E. Valc\u00e1rcel. Verger\u2019s images form an album of the descendants of the Inca in many phases of daily life, such as fishing, buying at market, and worshiping. He also documents ancient ruins, customs, dress, art, and functional objects. Born in France in 1902, Verger also contributed to the 1956 book From Incas to Indios<\/em>, along with Werner Bischof and Robert Frank. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with tiny edgewear. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. POLAND. HARTWIG, Edward. <\/strong>Kazimierz nad Wisla<\/em>, Warsaw: Wydawnictwo Sztuka, 1957. Hardcover (gray-stamped gray cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00bd inches, 80 pages, 66 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This is a picture book, printed in high-quality gravure, on Wisla, a town in Southern Poland, near the border of the Czech Republic. Hartwig concentrates on the city\u2019s historic and vernacular architecture, dating to the seventeenth century. The place is favored by skiers in the winter, due to nearby mountains, and some of the images were then. There are two photographs of plein-air painters, suggesting that the town harbored a strong artistic tradition.\u00a0\u00a0 Edward Hartwig (1909-2003) was an influential Polish photographer during the 1960s and seventies. He was exposed to photography early by his father, began using the medium seriously in 1925, and studied under the great Viennese photographer Rudolf Koppitz. He produced nationalistic pictures due to Communist rule in his country and was part of the movement of \u201cFatherland Photography.\u201d Text, in Polish, by Karola Sicinskiego. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is not: worn and missing pieces. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. POLAND. HARTWIG, Edward. <\/strong>Moja Ziemia<\/em>, Warsaw: Sport Turystyka, 1962. Hardcover (green-stamped yellow cloth), 10 \u00be x 8 \u00bc inches, 176 pages, 150 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Comprised solely of rural and landscape images that Hartwig made in Poland\u2014the title translates to \u201cMy Native Land.\u201d The rich gravures picture trees, woods, fields, farming, wild life, and small villages, in many seasons. This is the most artistic of Hartwig\u2019s books here, with the images often bleeding off the pages and not identified to specific locales. Includes an introduction by the photographer and an essay on all four seasons by Julia Hartwig, presumably his wife. While the main text is in Polish, there are summaries in Russian, German, French, and English, in a booklet that is laid in. Two corners bumped, in dustjacket that is torn, chipped, and wrinkled. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. POLAND. HARTWIG, Edward. <\/strong>Cracow<\/em>, Warsaw: Sport Turystyka,1966. Hardcover (blind and turquoise-stamped cream cloth), 9 \u00be x 8 \u00bc inches,200 pages, 187 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Hartwig\u2019s extensive visual record of Poland\u2019s primary urban setting. He shows its daily life, parks, and architecture\u2014old and new, interior and exterior. Preface by Jerzy Broszkiewicz, in English. Includes extended captions, also in English. Two bumped corners to cloth, in dustjacket that is edgeworn and missing a piece. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. POLAND. VISNIAC, Roman. <\/strong>Polish Jews: A Pictorial Record<\/em>, New York: Schocken Books, 1965. Softcover, 10 \u00be x 8 \u00bc inches, 80 pages, 31 halftone illustrations. Signed, with ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Though modest in size, this is Vishniac\u2019s leading title on the subject. The publisher first released it in 1947 and it was so popular that it went through at least six printings. The pictures, made mostly in Poland and Lithuania in 1938, are split between street and shop scenes in the Jewish ghettos and boys and men undertaking religious study. Introductory essay, \u201cThe Inner World of the Polish Jew,\u201d by Dr. Abraham Joshua Heschel.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Laid in is a flyer for a 1983 exhibition of Vischniac\u2019s work in Minneapolis. This copy inscribed by Vischniac. Previous owner\u2019s label on half-title page, light wear and folds to covers. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. POLAND. VISNIAC, Roman. <\/strong>Isaac Bachevis Singer, A Day of Pleasure: Stories of a Boy Growing up in Warsaw<\/em>, New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1969. Hardcover (gold-stamped brown cloth), 8 \u00bc x 6 \u00bc inches, 228 pages, 20 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Singer, a Nobel-prize winner, recounts his boyhood days in Poland, from 1908 to 1918. \u201cOn Warsaw\u2019s Krochmalna Street in that time gone by, breezes from the Vistula and the Praga forest mingled with gutter smells and the aroma of fresh bagels. There scholars and urchins, peddlers and rabbis, thieves, even hobgoblins and imps, were at home; and young Isaac was curious about them all.\u201d Vishniac\u2019s full-page pictures show Jewish men, women, and children at market, studying, worshiping, and at other everyday activities. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with minor edgewear. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. POLAND. WDOWINSKI, Zdzislaw. <\/strong>Amist Forests and Lakes<\/em>, Warsaw: Sport Turystyka, 1955. Hardcover (green-stamped blue cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00bd inches, 168 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This book follows a trio of ornithologists on a trip through the Masurian Lake District of northeast Poland, as they caught and tagged birds. The rich gravure images show nests, eggs, and a host of specific winged creatures. Among them are thrushes, woodpeckers, buzzards, owls, eagles, starlings, and herons. Wdowinski also turned his camera on the group\u2019s campsites and the surrounding woods, water, and flowers. Tiny discoloration to front cover, in dustjacket with edgewear and a few tears. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. PORTUGAL. SLAVIN, Neal. <\/strong>Portugal<\/em>, New York: Lustrum Press, 1971. Softcover, 11 x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, duotone illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      The first book by Slavin (born 1941) and one of Lustrum\u2019s earliest publications, issued that same year as Larry Clark\u2019s Tulsa<\/em> and Danny Seymour\u2019s A Loud Song<\/em>. A somewhat oblique look at the people of Portugal, such as a soldier, a shop keeper, and caf\u00e9 inhabitants. With Mary McCarthy\u2019s \u201cLetter from Portugal,\u201d which originally appeared in 1955 and 1961. This copy signed by Slavin. Miniscule wear to spine. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. ROMANIA. SERBAN, George. <\/strong>Romulus Vulpescu, Rambling About Bucharest<\/em>, Bucharest: Meridiane Publishing House, 1968. Hardcover (paper over boards), 11 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 206 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Published just three years after the Communist dictator Nicolae Ceausecu came to power, this is obviously a propaganda piece, meant to show the splendor of Romania\u2019s capital city and the contentment of its people. It, in fact, is a well-designed book, full of better than average photographs, presented in rich gravure. The image used for the endpapers effectively contrasts the old (a small, asymmetrical one-story house) with the new (a high-rise apartment building with identical windows and balconies). Also eye catching is the way in which the title of the book is presented, spread across three separate left-hand pages (one for each word), opposite of which are images that vary nicely in their scale and subject matter. The back cover features a statement by Serban, which commences, \u201cTo photograph your own native town is tantamount to painting your own portrait.\u201d He goes on to indicate that his camera \u201crouses you like an alarm clock from your dreamy mood and, having caught you red-handed in the act of mooning [daydreaming?], impels you to take an occasional snapshot with faked zeal, as one greets an acquaintance one has lost sight of for long.\u201d George Serban (1954-1994) was a Romanian journalist, politician, and writer, who made the images for this book when he was only 24 years old and who was active in the revolution that freed the country in 1989. Gouges and tape repair to cover, in dustjacket with minimal edgewear. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. RUSSIA. Another Russia: Through the Eyes of the New Soviet Photographers<\/em><\/strong>, New York: Facts on File Publications, 1986. Hardcover (gold-stamped orange cloth), 10 \u00be x 9 inches, 176 pages, 144 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This is a very good compendium of then current work from Russia and its satellite Baltic states, drawn from the collection of Daniela Mr\u00e1kov\u00e1 and Vladimir Reme\u0161 and with an introduction by Ian Jeffrey. Nearly twenty photographers, most of them focusing on the human condition, are included, each with a lengthy commentary and biographies by the collectors. Among the standouts are Vladimir Siomin (featured on the cover), Antanas Sutkus, and Aleksandras Macijauskas. Price tag and tiny fold to top of spine, otherwise near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. RUSSIA. BOURKE-WHITE, Margaret.<\/strong> Eyes on Russia<\/em>, New York: Simon and Schuster, 1931. Hardcover (black-stamped tan cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 inches, 136 pages, 40 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This is Bourke-White\u2019s first and most significant book, produced when she was only 25years old. She both wrote the text and provided the images, primarily of male and female workers and the dynamic architecture of Soviet industry. The dustjacket quotes her as saying, \u201cThings are happening in Russia, and happening with staggering speed. I could not afford to miss any of it. I wanted to make the pictures of this astonishing development, because, whatever the outcome, whether success or failure, the plan is so gigantic, so unprecedented in all history, that I felt that these photographic records might have some historical value. I saw the five-year plan as a great scenic drama being unrolled before the eyes of the world.\u201d Two pages stained from laid in newsprint article titled \u201cRussians See Hope in a Change of Policy.\u201d The cloth is particularly bright, due to the presence of the rare dustjacket, which is worn and missing pieces. $2,500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. RUSSIA. BOURKE-WHITE, Margaret.<\/strong> Eyes on Russia<\/em>, another copy. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This copy is inscribed to an individual, \u201cin remembrance of one of my [illegible] photographing days in the open iron mines.\u201d This probably refers to Bourke-White\u2019s 1936 visit to the Mesabi Iron Range in northern Minnesota. Pasted onto a preliminary blank page is a portrait of the photographer, cut from the original dustjacket, the rest of which is missing. Front hinge separating, covers lightly browned, with faint ring mark. $2,500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. RUSSIA. BOURKE-WHITE, Margaret.<\/strong> Shooting the Russian War<\/em>, New York: Simon and Schuster, 1943. Hardcover (red and black-stamped gray cloth), 9 \u00bd x 6 \u00be inches, 300 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Third printing.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Bourke-White\u2019s first-person written and visual account of the Russian people under siege by the Germans at the beginning of World War II. Includes her extended captions to the pictures. Chipped dustjacket is laminated. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. RUSSIA. CAPA, Robert. <\/strong>John Steinbeck, A Russian Journal<\/em>, New York: Viking Press, 1948. Hardcover (blue-stamped yellow and blue cloth), 9 \u00be x 6 \u00be inches, 220 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Capa joined with the great Steinbeck to paint a portrait of the people of the U.S.S.R. during the 1940s. Despite Stalin Communist rule, the book is surprisingly \u201cgay,\u201d with images of factory workers, peasants, farmers, and intellectuals. The photographer and author traveled to Moscow, Stalingrad, the Ukraine, and the Caucasus. Previous owner\u2019s name, light shelf wear, in dustjacket that is chipped, torn, and missing small pieces. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. RUSSIA. CARTIER-BRESSON, Henri. <\/strong>The People of Moscow<\/em>, New York: Simon and Schuster, 1955. Hardcover (blue-stamped cream cloth), 11 x 8 \u00be inches, unpaginated, 163 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Cartier-Bresson obtained a visa to photograph the Russian capital only after sending a personal letter to the city\u2019s Society for Cultural Relations, along with a copy of his recent book, The Decisive Moment<\/em>. Once there, he was given free rein to shoot what he liked, producing images unlike any other outsider since World War I. The pictures, all richly reproduced in gravure, are presented in eleven major sections on subjects such as the Kremlin, the street, religion, the subway, sports, and youth. The dustjacket is chipped at the top of the spine and missing a few tiny pieces on the back. $175<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. RUSSIA. CARTIER-BRESSON, Henri. <\/strong>Henri Cartier-Bresson: About Russia<\/em>, New York: Viking, 1974. Hardcover (white-stamped black cloth), 10 \u00bd x 9 \u00be inches, unpaginated, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Images, reproduced in rich gravure, that HCB made in Russia in 1954 and 1972-73. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. RUSSIA. KLEIN, William. <\/strong>Moscow<\/em>, New York: Crown, 1964. Hardcover (black and red-stamped white cloth), 14 x 10 \u00bc inches, 184 pages, screen-gravure illustrations. Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Klein\u2019s exuberant examination of the Soviet Union\u2019s capital city. Comprises primarily images of its people, seen close up and in a myriad of activities\u2014the plates in rich gravure and bleeding of the page edges. With a preface by Harrison E. Salisbury and comments on many of the pictures by the photographer. This copy inscribed, signed, and with Klein\u2019s drawing of the hammer and sickle, in red ink. Lacking the dustjacket, with covers light struck and marked. $1,000<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. RUSSIA. RODCHENKO, Alexander.<\/strong> Vladimir Majakovskij: O Tom<\/em>, Prague: Mlad\u00e1 Fronta, 1987. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 \u00bc inches, 92 pages, 32 halftone illustrations (some in color). Signed.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Comprises Majakovsky\u2019s poem \u201cO Tom,\u201d illustrated with photomontages by Rodchenko. The latter juxtapose people, animals, typography, and modern inventions such as the airplane and telephone. Ends with an essay by Czech photography historian Vladimir Reme\u0161; all text in Czech. Though printed in an edition of 2,000 copies, this is a rare title in the United States. This copy signed and dated 1991 by Reme\u0161. Near fine condition. $250 \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 \u00a0<\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. RUSSIA. RODCHENKO, Alexander. <\/strong>The Family: \u201cThe Rodchenko Family Darkroom,\u201d<\/em> New York: Sander Gallery, 1993. Softcover, 11 \u00bd x 5 \u00be inches, 32 pages, 35 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This catalog accompanied an exhibition of work by four generations of the Rodchenko family, dating from the 1920s to 1992 and including the following genres: experimental photography, photomontage, photographic portraits, photograms, and photo-poetry. In addition to the patriarch, the contributors were Varvara Stepanova, Nikolai Lavrentiev, Alexander Lavrentiev, Irina Presnetsova, and Ekaterina Larentieva. The catalog has a scrapbook-like appearance, as it uses typewriter type and fourteen of the illustrations are color electrostatic copies that are tipped in. Issued in a numbered edition of only 125 copies. Fine condition. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. RUSSIA. ROZKOV, Jurij. <\/strong>Vladimir Majakovsky, Kurskym Delnikum, Tento Prozatimni Pomnik<\/em>, Prague: Mlad\u00e1 Fronta, 1982. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 inches, 50 pages, color halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Comprises Majakovsky\u2019s poem, illustrated with photomontages by Jurij Rozkov. Working at the same time and in the same style as Alexander Rodchenko, Rozkov provides collages that bustle with workers, factories, and machines. Most of them sport a heavy dose of Russian words. Introductory essay by Czech photography historian Vladimir Reme\u0161; all text in Czech. Though published in an edition of 1,000 copies, this is a rare title in the United States. This copy signed and dated 1991 by Reme\u0161. Near fine condition. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. RUSSIA. Soviet Art Photography<\/em><\/strong>, Moscow: Foreign Languages Publishing House, c. 1960. Hardcover (black-stamped gray cloth), 11 \u00bd x 9 \u00bc inches, unpaginated, 149 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Produced during the reign of Nikita Khrushchev, this was obviously a propaganda piece for the Soviet Union. It promotes the productivity and happiness of its people, the success of its industries, and the beauty of its natural environment. The genres represented go far beyond only \u201cart\u201d photography, with a heavy emphasis on portraiture and photo-journalism. Among the credited photographers are Max Alpert, Dmitri Baltermanz, and Boris Ignatovich. The short introduction and captions are printed in an amazing five languages, including Russian and English. The dustjacket features a muscular image of a bridge under construction and is overlaid with the original clear cover with printed typography. Last few pages wrinkled, in jackets that are torn and worn. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. RWANDA. PERESS, Gilles. <\/strong>The Silence<\/em>, New York: Scalo, 1995. Softcover, 9 x 6 \u00bd inches, 208 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Photographs depicting bodies, graves, and maimed survivors of the ethnic violence that racked Rwanda in 1994. This is an advance copy, unbound. Light edge wear. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. SCOTLAND. GROSART, Alexander B.<\/strong> The Works of Michael Bruce<\/em>, Edinburgh: William Oliphant, 1865. Hardcover (gold-stamped brown cloth),\u00a08 \u00bd x 7 inches, 264 pages, 10 mounted albumen prints.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Reverend Grosart selected and wrote about the work of Scottish poet Michael Bruce and provided a memoir. The uncredited albumen prints, about 4 \u00bc x 3 inches in size, picture Bruce\u2019s tombstone (frontispiece), a rock formation, trees, and village streets and buildings (all uncaptioned). Front and back hinges loose, with light wear to the covers. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. SCOTLAND. HILL, David Octavius.<\/strong> Heinrich Schwarz, David Octavius Hill, Master of Photography<\/em>, New York: Viking Press, 1931. Hardcover (blind and gold-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00be x 9 \u00bc inches, 230 pages, 80 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This is one of the earliest biographies on a photographer, first appearing in German and preceding our current understanding of Hill\u2019s collaboration with Robert Adamson. The portraits are of both prominent and common British men and women, such as Lady Elizabeth Eastlake and John Ruskin. Includes two profile portraits of Hill by Adamson and biographical information on many of the sitters. David Octavius Hill (1802-1870) was a pioneering British photographer who took up the medium when he was commissioned in 1843 to make a painting of the 474 ministers of the Church of Scotland. Hill and Adamson\u2019s calotype portraits are now renowned for their lighting and poses. Endpapers browned, previous\u2019 owner\u2019s name and date, and light edgewear to covers. $150<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. SCOTLAND. HILL, David Octavius.<\/strong> Heinrich L. Nickel, David Octavius Hill: Wurzeln und Wirkungen Seiner Lichtbildkunst<\/em>, Halle, Germany: Fotokin-overlag, 1960. Hardcover (black-stamped gray cloth), 9 \u00bc x 6 \u00bd inches, 96 pages, 45 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        A small examination of the life and work of Hill (and Adamson). Includes biographic information on some of the 35 individuals who are seen in full-page portraits, like Professor Alexander Monro. Text in German. Near fine condition, in dustjacket that is worn. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. SCOTLAND. STRAND, Paul. <\/strong>Basil Davidson, Tir A\u2019Mhurain: Outer Hebrides<\/em>, London: MacGibbon & Kee, 1962. Hardcover (black-stamped tan cloth), 11 x 9 inches, 152 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Writer Davidson and Strand\u2019s lyrical examination of Scotland\u2019s western islands, the Outer Hebrides. Most of the images are richly printed portraits, landscapes, and details of the rugged life lived by the island\u2019s inhabitants. Dustjacket worn and missing small pieces. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. SCOTLAND. VALENTINE & Sons.<\/strong> Sir Walter Scott, The Lady of the Lake<\/em>, London: Adam & Charles Black, 1904. Hardcover (green, white and silver-stamped blue cloth), 8 x 5 \u00be inches, 160 pages, 42 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Scott\u2019s influential nineteenth-century poem, set in Scotland over six days. This story appeared in many illustrated editions, including at least two with original albumen prints by George Washington Wilson (see below). Valentine provided appropriate landscape scenes, such as Loch Katrine, Bracklinn Falls, Holyrood Palace, and Stirling Palace. Includes a few color illustrations after hand-rendered images, work by a few other photographers, and a fold-out map. Based in Dundee, James Valentine (1815-1879) became one of Scotland\u2019s largest producers of topographic photographs, beginning in the 1860s. William Valentine and other sons continued the business, which eventually concentrated on printing picture postcards. Previous owner\u2019s inscription, with a little wear to spine and covers, which features an intricate floral pattern. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. SCOTLAND. VALENTINE & Sons.<\/strong> Photographic View Album of Edinburgh<\/em>, Dundee, Scotland: Valentine & Sons, c. 1895. Hardcover (cloth spine with gold-stamped printed paper over boards), 7 x 9 inches, 24 pages, 20 collotype illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              A view book of Scotland\u2019s capital, built around seven hills. Valentine\u2019s straight-forward images show some of the city\u2019s main points of interest at the time: Edinburgh Castle, National Gallery, St. Giles Cathedral, Scott Monument, Forth Bridge, and Linlithgow Palace. Presented one per page, the reproductions are printed by the high-quality collotype process. Cord tie binding a little loose, foxing to pastedowns and endpapers, and minor edgewear to covers. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. SCOTLAND. WILSON, George Washington.<\/strong> Sir Walter Scott, The Lady of the Lake<\/em>, Edinburgh: Adam & Charles Black, 1863. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth), 7 x 4 \u00be inches, 340 pages, 10 mounted albumen prints.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Scott\u2019s influential nineteenth-century poem, set in Scotland over six days. Wilson\u2019s rich albumen prints (about 4 x 3 inches each, with tissue guards) are accompanied by specific lines from the poem and are primarily landscapes. They show woods, lakes, a waterfall, boathouse, and Stirling Castle. Listed in Gernsheim, Incunabula of British Photographic Literature, 1839-1875<\/em>. Rear hinge loose and covers worn. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. SCOTLAND. WILSON, George Washington<\/strong> (attribution). Sir Walter Scott, The Lady of the Lake<\/em>, Edinburgh: Adam & Charles Black, 1871. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 7 x 4 \u00bd inches, 354 pages, 5 mounted albumen prints.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Another edition, with fewer images, which are uncredited. This selection pictures Doune Castle (frontispiece), Loch Katrine, Glenfinlas, Benvenue, and Loch Lubnaig. See: Goldschmidt and Naef, The Truthful Lens<\/em>. Front hinge loose and covers lightly worn. $250<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. SCOTLAND. WILSON, George Washington.<\/strong> George Washington Wilson: Studies from a Point of View<\/em>, Edinburgh: Scottish Arts Council, 1978. Softcover, 7 \u00be x 8 \u00bc inches, 32 pages, 14 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Catalog for a traveling exhibition, with research and text by Roger Taylor and professor J. R. Watson. The images include landscapes and views of fishermen, Balmoral Castle, Glasgow Cathedral, and Aberdeen streets. George Washington Wilson (1823-1893) was universally known among photographers during the late nineteenth century. Based in Aberdeen, Scotland, he rivaled his contemporaries Francis Frith and James Valentine for sales of stereographs, other card photographs, and full-scale prints to tourists and the armchair traveler, all identified with his initials \u201cG.W.W.\u201d He was commissioned to document the construction of Balmoral Castle and its residents, the British Royal Family. He became the leading portrait photographer in Aberdeen, and continued the business until 1908. Near fine condition, with a few bends to spine. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. SCOTLAND. WILSON, George Washington.<\/strong> Roger Taylor, George Washington Wilson: Artist and Photographer, 1823-93<\/em>, Aberdeen, Scotland: Aberdeen University Press, 1981. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth), 8 \u00be x 10 \u00bc inches, 204 pages, 220 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This apparently remains the only major book on Wilson, by a leading English photographic historian. It is a full-scale biography and look at the photographer\u2019s work, placing him in the context of tourism in the nineteenth century. Taylor examines his early life, foundation for his success, appointment to photograph the Queen of England, landscape work, international recognition, and technical and aesthetic considerations. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with small wrinkles to edges. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. SCOTLAND. WILSON, George Washington.<\/strong> Donald Macaulay, George Washington Wilson in the Hebrides<\/em>, Aberdeen, Scotland: Aberdeen University Library, 1984. Softcover, 8 \u00bc x 11 \u00bc inches, 44 pages, 55 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        As part of his extensive documentation of Scotland, Wilson spent time in the archipelago of islands off the country\u2019s west coast. He photographed the landscape, lakes, stone cottages, burial grounds, mansions, castles, lighthouses, and fishing fleets. Its inhabitants are shown farming, spinning, and tending livestock. Covers rubbed and lightly bent, with remnants of bookplate inside front cover. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. SOMALIA. SHEIKH, Fazal. <\/strong>A Camel for the Son<\/em>, G\u00f6ttingen, Germany: Steidl, 2001. Hardcover (paper over boards), 9 x 6 \u00be inches, 124 pages, duotone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This beautifully designed and printed book presents portraits of Somali refugees who had fled war to camps in Kenya. Virtually all women and children, they are formally posed and touchingly portrayed. The title of the book refers to the Somalian tradition of giving a newborn son a camel, with the hopes that by the time the child has become a man the camel has sired a whole herd, which will support him as an adult. With booklet of foreign-language text. Born in New York in 1965, Fazal Sheikh has committed his career to documenting people living in displaced and marginalized communities around the world. Mint condition, in opened shrink wrap. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. SOMALIA. SHEIKH, Fazal. <\/strong>Ramadan Moon<\/em>, G\u00f6ttingen, Germany: Steidl, 2001. Hardcover (paper over boards), 9 x 6 \u00be inches, 56 pages, duotone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This companion book to the above comprises portraits of Somali women who had sought asylum in the Netherlands, along with dark impressionistic images of trees, windows, and the night sky. The text includes statements by the women and a chronology of Somali immigrating to Holland. The book states that it was being distributed to Dutch legislators, judges, and the media, in hopes of fostering more sympathetic attitudes towards all asylum seekers. The title of the book refers to the crescent moon that inaugurates the month of fasting by Muslims. With booklet of foreign-language text. Mint condition, in opened shrink wrap. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. SOUTH AFRICA. COLE, Ernest. <\/strong> House of Bondage<\/em>, New York: Random House, 1967. Hardcover (gold-stamped cream cloth), 11 \u00be x 8 \u00bd inches, 192 pages, screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              A powerful record by an insider of life for blacks in South Africa under apartheid, showing examples of violence, discrimination, and poverty. The text is by New York Times<\/em> correspondent Joseph Lelyveld, who characterized the country as \u201cone of the least-known\u201d in the world, and the images are printed in high-quality gravure. Ernest Cole (1940-1990) was perhaps South Africa\u2019s most important native photographer of the 1960s. By getting himself classified as colored, rather than black (a meaningful distinction in the eyes of the government), he was able to secure photographic assignments from newspapers and magazines. Cole, however, left South Africa in 1966, one step ahead of the law, in order to publish the book, which, unsurprisingly, was banned in his home country. Near find condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. SOUTH AFRICA. WEINER, Dan. <\/strong>Alan Paton, South Africa in Transition<\/em>, New York; Charles Scribner\u2019s Sons, 1956. Hardcover (red-stamped black and cream cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00bd inches, unpaginated, 82 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This project grew out of a magazine article Paton and Weiner produced on blacks in America a few years earlier. They travelled together extensively throughout South Africa, recording rural tribal life, developing urban centers, and labor in the country\u2019s gold mines. This is the only book Weiner illustrated and an early, often overlooked study of the subject. Dan Weiner (1919-1959) became a photojournalist and member of the Photo League after serving in World War II. His pictures appeared in Collier\u2019s <\/em>and Fortune<\/em> and exhibitions such as \u201cThe Family of Man\u201d and \u201cThe Concerned Photographer\u201d (1967, International Center of Photography), which was accompanied by a book. He died young, at forty, in a plane crash. Corner bumped and light edge scuffing, in dustjacket that is torn and missing a few pieces. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. SOUTH POLE. PONTING, Herbert G. <\/strong>The Great White South or With Scott in the Antarctic<\/em>, London: Duckworth, 1932. Hardcover (black-stamped blue cloth), 8 \u00be x 5 \u00be inches, 306 pages, halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This is Ponting\u2019s detailed account of his time with Captain Robert Scott on his failed attempt to reach the South Pole during the expedition of 1910-1913. It includes an introduction by Scott\u2019s widow and extensive coverage of Antarctic animals such as seals and penguins. This is the tenth impression of a book originally published in 1921. Light wear to covers, in dustjacket that is worn and missing part of top of spine. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. SPAIN. BRASSAI.<\/strong> Fiesta in Seville<\/em>, New York: Studio-Crowell, 1956. Hardcover (gold-stamped blue cloth), 10 \u00be x 8 \u00bd inches, 152 pages, 140 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Preface by Henri de Montherlant, text by Dominique Aubier, and notes by the photographer.\u00a0\u00a0 Brassai turns his camera on the events of the annual Holy Week and its following fair in the Andalusian city of Seville. The sumptuous religious spectacle includes hooded processions of penitents, Christs in agony, Virgins decked out in the manner of Oriental princesses, and an accompanying cacophony of music. Previous owner\u2019s name and date, in worn dustjacket that is missing pieces. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. SPAIN. BUCKLEY, Peter. <\/strong>Bullfight<\/em>, New York: Simon and Schuster, 1958. Hardcover (red and gold stamped black cloth and paper over boards),\u00a012 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 192 pages, 110 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      A compelling look at the Spanish spectacle that is the bullfight, through the author\u2019s narrative and photographs. Buckely (born in New York in 1925) spent six bullfight seasons in Spain, going to numerous cities. The rich gravure reproductions arc from the opening blare of trumpets through the ritual acts with lance and cape, to the final encounter between man and animal. The text is a fictional tale of 24 hours in the lives of three matadors. Near fine condition, in dustjacket with tiny edgewear. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. SPAIN. FONTANELLA, Lee.<\/strong> Photography in Spain in the Nineteenth Century<\/em>, San Francisco: Fraenkel Gallery, and Delahunty Gallery, Dallas, 1983. Softcover, 11 \u00be x 8 \u00be inches, 40 pages, halftone illustrations. Ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This is a dealers\u2019 catalog, offering 67 items for sale, with a brief history of nineteenth-century Spanish photography.\u00a0\u00a0 There are pictures and biographies of the following photographers, many of them unknown outside of the country: Beauchy Family, Frank Charteris, Charles Clifford, Jos\u00e9 Garcia Ayola, Juan Laurent, Francisco de Leygonier, Pedro Martinez de Hebert, Alejandro Massari, Luis Le\u00f3n Mass\u00f3n, Auguste Muriel, R. P. Napper, and Jos\u00e9 Spreafico. Also includes images of seventeen stamps, signatures, and marks of photographers. Laid into this copy is a pricelist. Near fine condition. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. SPAIN. HOFER, Evelyn. <\/strong>James Morris, The Presence of Spain<\/em>, New York: Harcourt, Brace and World, 1964. Hardcover (gold-stamped green cloth), 11 \u00bc x 8 \u00be inches, 120 pages, gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Features Hofer\u2019s precise photographs of people and architecture, made with a large-format camera and presented in high-quality gravure. Far exceeding the look of most \u201ctravel\u201d photographs, the pictures reveal her sensitive eye and connection with the subjects.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          German-born Evelyn Hofer (1922-2009) spent most of her life in the United States, where she emigrated in 1946. She produced fashion work for Vogue<\/em> and Vanity Fair<\/em> and made pictures for many Time-Life books. Her most lasting legacy, however, are the six location books (of which this is one) published primarily during the 1960s in a similar format. Cloth lightly browned and with one nick, in dustjacket with mild edgewear. $25<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 <\/strong><\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. SPAIN. MORATH, Inge<\/strong>. Dominique Aubier, Fiesta in Pamplona<\/em>, Paris: Robert Delpire, and Universe Books, New York, 1956. Hardcover (gray-stamped white cloth), 11 \u00bc x 9 inches, 148 pages, screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Visual and written elaborations on the week-long festival of St. Firmin that takes place in the northern Spanish city of Pamplona. Morath photographed the opening parade, the famous running of the bulls through the city streets, and the final stadium bull fights. Features a design by Picasso on the cloth cover and high-quality gravure images inside by the photographer. Inge Morath (1923-2002) was a long-time member of the Magnum photo agency and produced many books, including some with her playwright husband, Arthur Miller. Dustjacket with minor edgewear. $75<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. SPAIN. ORTIZ ECHAGUE, Jos\u00e9. <\/strong>Spanische K\u00f6pfe<\/em>, Berlin: Verlag Ernest Wasmuth, 1929. Hardcover (gold-stamped red cloth and paper over boards),\u00a011 \u00be x 8 \u00bd inches, 112 pages, 80 screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This is the first edition of what one year later became Espa\u00f1a: Tipos y Trajes<\/em>, the first of an important set of four books by Ortiz-Echag\u00fce on Spain. Inexplicably published in Germany (unlike any of the others), it depicts village people in their traditional clothing. The quality gravures show men and women dancing, playing instruments, worshiping, and interacting in other ways. The photographer provided notes for most images and others wrote about the three areas from which the subjects hailed: Andalusia, Aragon, and Castile. Jos\u00e9 Ortiz-Echag\u00fce (1886-1980) is the internationally best-known Spanish photographer of all time; calling him the Picasso of Spanish photography would not be inaccurate. Active in the medium for over sixty years, he was the leader of the photographic community in Madrid and active as a salon exhibitor worldwide. He was widely heralded for his Fresson (or direct-carbon) prints, which showed masterful manipulation. His work became known to a vast popular audience through an important set of four books he published, depicting the people, landscape, religion, customs, and architecture of Spain (see below). Text in German, with captions in four languages (including English). Previous owner\u2019s bookplate, wear to tips and top and bottom of spine. Lacking the rare dustjacket. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. SPAIN. ORTIZ ECHAGUE, Jos\u00e9.<\/strong><\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 <\/em>\u00a0Espa\u00f1a: Tipos y Trajes<\/em> seems to have been Ortiz-Echag\u00fce\u2019s most popular title, printed in at least twelve editions over thirty-four years. This edition expands greatly on the above, in both scale and number of reproductions, now including some full-color images, such as the one on the cover of two men and a woman in brightly colored garb, sitting outside and smiling. Many more types of Spanish folk are pictured, such as fishermen, horse riders, and students, wearing a wide variety of hats, jewelry, and other rich accessories. The thirty-four color plates are all tipped in. Previous owner\u2019s stamp, two corners lightly bumped, in dustjacket with a few tears and a little wear.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 <\/strong>Espa\u00f1a: Pueblos y Paisajes<\/em>, Madrid: Publicaciones Ortiz-Echag\u00fce, 1947. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth), 12 \u00bc x 9 \u00bd inches, 312 pages, 312 screen-gravure illustrations, dustjacket. Third edition. First published in 1938, Ortiz-Echag\u00fce\u2019s second book pictures the cities and landscape of Spain. Architecture dominates, from both large and small locales: private houses, churches, bridges, castles, and museums. Prologues by Azorin and Jos\u00e9 M. Salaverria, with notes on the plates by the photographer. Near fine condition, with previous owner\u2019s bookplate and browned dustjacket with a few chips.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Espa\u00f1a Mistica<\/em>, Madrid: Publicaciones Ortiz-Echag\u00fce, 1964. Hardcover (gold-stamped maroon cloth), 12 \u00bd x 10 \u00bd inches, 330 pages, 289 screen-gravure and 12 color halftone illustrations. Fourth edition. First published in 1943, this is the third book in Ortiz-Echag\u00fce\u2019s set of four. Includes a prologue by Miguel Herrero Garcia and notes on the images by the photographer. Easily his most spiritual book, Mistica<\/em> pictures various aspects of Spain\u2019s religious traditions, including ceremonies, rituals, statues, churches, monasteries, and graveyards. Most haunting are images of monks in hooded robes praying and performing other activities. Light scratching and tiny wear to covers, missing the dustjacket.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0\u00a0 Espa\u00f1a: Castillos y Alc\u00e1zares<\/em>, Madrid: Publicaciones Ortiz-Echag\u00fce, 1960. Hardcover (gold-stamped red cloth), 12 \u00bd x 10 \u00be inches, 384 pages, 396 screen-gravure and 16 color halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Third edition. Signed. Tomo 4, the final volume in the set, initially issued in 1956. In this one Ortiz-Echag\u00fce presents a vast selection of the castles and fortresses of Spain, in locations from Alava to Zaragoza. He frequently captures them from below, producing dramatic compositions with billowing cloud formations. All the color images are full bleeds, resulting in oversize reproductions. Text by the photographer and Fray Justo P\u00e9rez de Urbel. This copy is inscribed by Ortiz Echag\u00fce in the year of publication. A few lightly bumped corners, in dustjacket that is worn, chipped, and torn.\u00a0The complete set of 4, with one signed: $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. SPAIN. ORTIZ ECHAGUE, Jos\u00e9. <\/strong>Jos\u00e9 Ortiz-Echag\u00fce Photographs<\/em>, London: Gordon Fraser, 1979. Hardcover (silver-stamped black cloth), 11 \u00bd x 10 \u00bd inches, 128 pages, 57 halftone illustrations, dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  This is the first English-language monograph on Ortiz-Echag\u00fce, published with his input when he was ninety-three years old; it appeared in Spanish in 1978. In includes his own essay on his life as a photographer and a biographical note by Gerardo Vielba. The well-chosen images represent his encyclopedic look at the people, architecture, landscape, and religion of Spain. Ends with a listing of his exhibitions, prizes, and awards, spanning the years 1915 to 1978. Near fine condition. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. SPAIN. ORTIZ ECHAGUE, Jos\u00e9. <\/strong>Ortiz-Echag\u00fce<\/em>, Fundacion Universitaria de Navarra, Spain, 1998. Softcover, 14 x 10 \u00be inches, 206 pages, 153 halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    This large-format book presents a healthy selection of the photographer\u2019s most artistic pictures, dating from 1930 to 1964. Many of them show the manicured effects of his favored Fresson printing process. Features a bibliography and four scholarly essays, by Joan Fontcuberta, Lee Fontanella, and others. Produced with the aid and blessing of Ortiz-Echag\u00fce\u2019s son Legardo. Text in Spanish. Tiny bumps to one corner and spine. $50<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1. SWEDEN. Svensk Fotokonst: 1948-1951<\/em><\/strong>, G\u00f6teborg: Konstmuseum, 1953. Softcover, 7 x 4 \u00be inches, 48 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      This is the catalog for a show of recent Swedish photographs presented at the art museum in Gothenburg. The images reproduced show modernist tendencies characteristic of late pictorialism. The cover, for instance, presents what appears to be a still life of a ragged wall cutout flanked by the shadows of a telephone and an abstract sculpture. More identifiable subjects include a parrot in a cage, figures, and a bullfight. None of the names are known to me, but those individuals with more than one illustration are Rolf Winquist (born 1910) and Hans Hammarski\u00f6ld (born 1925). With an introduction, in Swedish, by Alfred Westholm. Worldcat lists only five copies in American libraries. Light rubbing to covers. $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. SWITZERLAND. Our Leave in Switzerland<\/em>, <\/strong>Zurich: Zur Limmat, 1946. Hardcover (plain boards), 11 \u00be x 8 \u00be inches, 180 pages, 200 screen-gravure illustrations (some in color), dustjacket.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        This is a \u201csouvenir of the visit of American soldiers to Switzerland in 1945\/46.\u201d The picture book touches on the country\u2019s people, landscape, architecture, industry, politics, and military. About fifty photographers contributed pictures, the most prominent of which is Werner Bischof. Covers rubbed, scratched, and worn (as is usual). $35<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. VIETNAM. GRIFFITH, Philip Jones. <\/strong>Vietnam Inc.<\/em>, New York: Macmillan, 1971. Softcover, 11 x 8 inches, 224 pages, halftone illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This is Griffiths\u2019 searing examination of the effects of the Vietnamese conflict on both soldiers and civilians. As a major Magnum photographer, he worked in the country between 1966 and 1970, capturing images of roundups of the enemy, drug use, prostitution, urban decadence, the destruction of villages, and the wounded and dead. Griffiths made clear in his text that he felt the United States was arrogantly attempting to impose its own values on Vietnam, pointing out the southeast Asian country had chosen communist politicians in its first election, in 1946. This is one of the few books published during the war that made a case against both the conflict and war in general. Light rubbing, scuffs, and edgewear to covers. $500<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. VIETNAM. YTSMA, Petronella J.<\/strong> Legacy of an Ecocide: Agent Orange Aftermath<\/em>, Minneapolis: Alifrom Publishing, 2009. Softcover, 7 \u00be x 7 \u00bd inches, 18 halftone illustrations, dustjacket. Signed special edition, with original photograph and ephemera.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Ytsma\u2019s sensitive portraits of three generations of Vietnamese who were affected by the lingering poisons of the agent orange that the United States dropped on their country during the Vietnam War. Includes portraits of soldiers and civilian adults and children, born between 1940 and 2008, recently photographed. Statements, in addition to the photographer\u2019s, by the directors of the War Legacies Project and the Special Initiative on Agent Orange. Born in Holland in 1948, Nel Ytsma is based in St. Paul, Minnesota, where she teaches and photographs as both an artist and professional. Laid in are three signed cards in envelopes from 2006, 2011, and 2012. This copy of the book is inscribed and dated 2009 by Ytsma. Additionally, this is number 51\/200 in the edition produced with a gelatin silver print (also signed). Fine condition. $350<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. WALES. MOFFAT, John.<\/strong> William Henry Gladstone, The Hawarden Visitor\u2019s Hand-Book<\/em>, Chester, England: Phillipson & Golder, 1890. Hardcover (black-stamped red cloth), 7 \u00bc x 4 \u00be inches, 40 pages, 2 mounted carbon prints.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This is Gladstone\u2019s small guidebook to the Wales town of Hawarden. The frontispiece is a studio portrait of the author by Moffat, with a facsimile of Gladstone\u2019s signature. The other carbon print is of Catherine Gladstone, presumably the author\u2019s wife, by G. Watmough Webster, of Chester, showing her with a pen and book, also with her facsimile signature. The book includes hand-rendered illustrations of a few local sites and a fold-out map of Hawarden Park and the old castle. John Moffat (1819-1894) was a pioneering Scottish photographer, based in Edinburgh. He opened his first studio in 1853, was prominent in the Photographic Society of Scotland since its inception in 1856, and in 1864 made a successful photograph of William Henry Fox Talbot by magnesium light. Near fine condition. $100<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \n
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. YUGOSLAVIA. RIWKIN-BRICK, Anna, and Astrid Lindgren. <\/strong>Marco Lives in Yugoslavia<\/em>, New York: MacMillan Company, 1962. Hardcover (white and black-stamped orange cloth), 8 \u00bd x 6 \u00bd inches, 48 pages, screen-gravure illustrations.<\/li>\n<\/ol>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                This is a children\u2019s book that originally appeared in Swedish. It\u2019s the story of a seven-year old, freckled boy who lives in a Macedonian village. Marco plays with his friends, attends a traditional wedding, and sees his piglet (a prized possession) escape from him halfway through the book. The last image, all of which are rendered in gravure, shows the pig returning to Marco at the end of the day and saying, \u201cOutings are a nice change now and again. But I, at least, have sense enough to come home for the night.\u201d Ex-library copy, with many markings. $10<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 <\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Herein, we leave the United States and venture to foreign lands, over both our northern and southern borders and across the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans to Europe, Asia, and beyond. The books are listed by country (from Austria to Yugoslavia) and then alphabetically by photographer or author. I have used the term Czechoslovakia for what is now the Czech Republic, because many of the Czech books listed here were published when it was the former. Not surprisingly, there are more entries for England (68) than any other country. And for those who are counting, the other most represented countries are Czechoslovakia (41), France (35), and Japan (30); these four comprise nearly half of the catalog. Note that some photographers essayed countries that were foreign to them<\/em>, prominent among them the Frenchman Henri Cartier-Bresson and American Margaret Bourke-White. Here is your opportunity for some enjoyable armchair travel.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                All items are subject to prior sale. Customers known to me will be invoiced. Others add shipping ($5 for each book within the U.S.) and write your check to \u201cChristian Peterson.\u201d Books may be returned within ten days, with prior notice and if received in the condition sent. I am always interested in hearing about specific books, photographers, or topics that you are seeking, and also any items you may wish to sell.<\/p>\n

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Catalog 11
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                \nJanuary 2016<\/p>\n","protected":false},"excerpt":{"rendered":"

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                AUSTRIA. KOPPITZ, Rudolf. Jo-Ann Conklin and Monika Faber, Rudolf Koppitz, 1884-1936, Vienna: Verlag Christian Brandst\u00e4tter, 1995. Softcover,\u00a011 \u00bc x 9 \u00bc inches, 128 pages, halftone illustrations. Signed. This handsome monograph was produced in conjunction with an exhibition seen at the University of Iowa Museum of Art and in Europe. Conklin, Faber, and Peter Weiermair provide […]<\/p>\n","protected":false},"author":2,"featured_media":0,"parent":0,"menu_order":0,"comment_status":"closed","ping_status":"closed","template":"","meta":{"_et_pb_use_builder":"","_et_pb_old_content":"","_et_gb_content_width":"","footnotes":""},"_links":{"self":[{"href":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/wp-json\/wp\/v2\/pages\/241"}],"collection":[{"href":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/wp-json\/wp\/v2\/pages"}],"about":[{"href":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/wp-json\/wp\/v2\/types\/page"}],"author":[{"embeddable":true,"href":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/wp-json\/wp\/v2\/users\/2"}],"replies":[{"embeddable":true,"href":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/wp-json\/wp\/v2\/comments?post=241"}],"version-history":[{"count":1,"href":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/wp-json\/wp\/v2\/pages\/241\/revisions"}],"predecessor-version":[{"id":578,"href":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/wp-json\/wp\/v2\/pages\/241\/revisions\/578"}],"wp:attachment":[{"href":"https:\/\/christianapeterson.com\/wp-json\/wp\/v2\/media?parent=241"}],"curies":[{"name":"wp","href":"https:\/\/api.w.org\/{rel}","templated":true}]}}